Home

Paradyne 3611 Computer Drive User Manual

Contents

1. Local Phone No Device Local Address DBM Installed Serial No Tributary Network Address SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Installed Diagnostic DBM Value General Options Value DBM Options Value Options DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Rate Kbps 14 4 12 0 9 6 4 8 2 4 or 56 Diag Type NonD Disr Mixed None RTS Ontrl FrcOn DTE PrtSp Kbps 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 E 4 4 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab or RE CTS Std RTS 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 emoteDiag 54 Enhan AnitStream Chang Disab 1 100 async terminal 1 100 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 LSD Lead Std Delay FrcOn 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab big Value CTS Lead Std Delay FrcOn Int DSU I DSR FrcOn Enab Disab CarrLossDisci Yes No Position Cntrl Trib G2Trb Auto Retrain f Yes No SystemStat Enab Disab 2 LinkConfig Pt Pt M Pt Single Rate T Yes No R Period 11210 DSR Tst Enab Disab Perig 1 2 ERI Enab Disabl AutoAnswer Enab Disab Trib TimOut Chang sec to min 10 sec u 3 TxElasStor Enab Disab Diag C DC Tst Pattern AT amp T S
2. DBM Options Value Backup Directory Dial String General Options Value Rate Kbps T 14 4 12 0 9 6 4 8 2 4 1 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 TxClkSource T Int RXC DSU Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 3 RTS FrcOn DTE Pim 4 CTS Std RTS CarrtossDiscT Yes NO 5 LSD Lead STD Delay FrcOn Auto Retrain Yes No 6 CTS Lead STD Delay FrcOn Single Rate T Yes No 7 SystemStat Enab Disab AutoAnswer Enab Disab 8 Circ Assur Enab Disab TxElasStor Enab Disab 9 Tst Pattern AT amp T Std RxElasStor Enab Disab 10 RespondRDL Enab Disab Call Setup None Pswrd Cllbk Alarm LL by DTE Enab Disab Chang RL by DTE Enab Disab TxPwd Chan V 13 Signl 2 Disab sa WO e zr Em RPower Dial Test Enab Disab DDD Interface T Permissive Programmable Frame Ground Connected Disconnected CCN by EL Enab Disab Primary Core Yes No Signal Ground SW Vers 3 22 4 41 Normal DtrCallCon Orig tt Ansr Disab Test Mode Indication Enabled Disabled AnswExtBU Enab Disab EchoCancel Enab Disab RLSD in MCMP Yes No Remote DBM 2 wire 4 wire LPDA 2 Options Value ChgMd Options Value LPDA 2 Enab Disab Backup Options Value Mode ADp LPDA Address Chang 1 256 Auto Bckup Enab Disab SNA Backup Enab Disab Backup Dir Chang 1 10 Code l
3. Pin Function EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 2 BA 103 Transmit Data TXD 3 BB 104 Received Data RXD 4 CA 105 Request to Send RTS 5 CB 106 Clear to Send CTS 6 CC 107 Data Set Ready DSR 7 AB 102 Signal Ground SG 8 CF 109 Received Line Signal Detect LSD 9 Positive Test Voltage 10 Negative Test Voltage 12 112 Data Signal Rate Selector DCE Source alternate external control lead 1 131 Data Signal Rate Selector 1 DCE Source alternate external control lead 11 15 DB 114 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DCE Source 17 DD 115 Receiver Signal Element Timing DCE Source 18 LL 141 Local Loopback LL 191 Data Signal Rate Selector DTE Source alternate external control alarm Lead Il 20 CD 108 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR 21 RL 140 Remote Digital Loopback RL 22 CE 125 Ring Indicator RI 2 23 CH 111 Data Signal Rate Selector DTE Source alternate external control alarm Lead 1 24 DA 113 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source 25 TM 142 Test Mode TM 1 The Data Signal Rate Selector functions are not supported for leads 13 19 and 23 These leads can be used for the external lead functions Ring Indicator is only available on a DBM V DBM S or DBM D at this time March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table
4. 491 12843 Figure 4 8 Digital Sharing 4 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Multiplexing and Digital Sharing When digital sharing is combined with the or MCMP multiplexing capability in band framing must be taken into account The TDM circuit card can support up to two digital sharing groups while the MCMP circuit card can support up to three NOTE Port Speed assignments should be the same at both the control and tributary DSUs CARRIER DDS 9600 BPS Some of the ports can be configured for multiplexing one port per channel and others can be configured as a digital sharing group For example two digital sharing groups can be multiplexed with the remaining port forming three channels as shown in Figure 4 9 The three channels are designated as A B and C in the example Framing and or secondary channel bandwidth can be taken from any of the multiplexing ports or from the digital sharing group In this example Port 6 is set to underspeed If framing is taken from the digital sharing group every port in the shared group runs at underspeed Keep in mind that extended circuits are not possible from an underspeed port or from any of the ports in a digital sharing group if the group is running underspeed 2400 BPS A BRS SECONDARY CHANNEL 400 BPS 4400 BPS B A 2400 BPS 4400 BPS C 2400 BPS 492 12844 01 Figure 4 9 Multip
5. 1 30 5 9 6 KBPS 494 1 4322 02 Figure 4 5 Multipoint Async Compatible Network 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Point to Point Multiplexing The 3600 Series DSU operating in TDM mode can be used for point to point circuits at speeds of up to 64 kbps Figure 4 6 shows a typical TDM application In point to point multiplexing the DTEs at Port 1 CARRIER PORT 1 PORT2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 OCCUPIES TWO PHYSICAL SLOTS DDS AND LADS SUBRATE 56 OR 64 KBPS communicate with one another the DTEs at Port 2 communicate with one another and so on The TDM point to point application provides the same functionality as six point to point circuits The DDS circuit can be provided by a service provider or a metallic 4 wire LADS facility PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 492 12841 01 Figure 4 6 Point to Point Multiplexing 4 10 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation TDM Backbone Circuit with Extensions Figure 4 7 shows a 3600 Series DSU with TDM as the DDS backbone with an analog private line APL extended circuit In this example Port 4 which is set to underspeed cannot support an extended circuit because extended circuit equipment cannot accept off speed clocks Port 1 at 2400 bps can be extended via a crossover cable to the extended circuit refer to Appendix C The extended cir
6. paku 5 15 Device EE A A E A a pd aS aa ES 5 15 POG DANG ask Se aco dash uay Na EE a pe Ea E 5 17 Local Loopback 222429409898 refe Re ERR RE RTS EES 5 17 DTE Loopback Bay ee ees 5 19 Digital Loopback i re a ERE rir a 5 20 Remote Digital Loopback Les nereo sh ete pe doled dices 5 22 iBilatetal sont vage IS o despliegue 5 24 5 25 Endo End osa suse tke 5 27 Bit 6 2252522 aa cere ege 5 29 MED MP 5 31 Contiguratio n Branch cas ore CE Det eM pakuq PE S tet eie pel aus 5 31 ds MMC TET 5 32 MUX Configuration Options 522222222252 eer eet maet ero a prede ctt onc fee 5 32 MUX Setup Option Set 22225 terr Ek RR REA uer GU CET VR S 5 33 Port Opton Sets rp e d weg eie naria s 5 37 Port Speed Configuration Options i u nade e gis 5 39 SUID PC 5 40 Adding Self te Poll List qu e eb Eat edere 5 40 Aedma TNS POM ee ETE 5 41 ibi 5 41 PRONE TR C wu
7. awa Bridged LADS Architecture Digital Bridge DSU NMS Control etm SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Addressing Assigning an Address to the Control DSU Assigning an Address to the Tributary DSU NetView Initiated Dial Backup Multipoint Dial Backup Multiplexing with TDM or MCMP Digital Sharing lay sua e Overview A TDM can be configured to provide point to point time division multiplexing digital sharing or digital bridging capability An MCMP can be configured to provide point to point time division multiplexing multichannel multipoint multiplexing or digital bridge capability Network Terminology Data transmission between 3600 Series DSUs and compatible devices occurs in either of two ways point to point or multipoint The device at the host computer or nearest to the host computer end of a circuit is designated the control The devices on the other end are designated tributaries Point to Point Transmission In point to point transmission there is one DSU at each end of the digital facility The control DSU and the tributary may be 3600 Series DSUs or one of the other devices listed in the DSU Compatibility section of Chapter 1 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide A circuit emp
8. C 12 C 5 6 Port Connector Module Part Number 870 1700 0011 C 14 C 6 6 Port V 35 Interconnect Cable Feature Number 3600 F3 500 C 16 D 1 TDM Configuration Scenario 1 Two Synchronous Channels D 2 D 2 TDM Configuration Scenario 2 Switched 56 kbps Dial Backup D 4 D 3 Digital Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Dial Backup CR PE tueri Sab bo Rd V Ed D 6 D 4 Digital Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Dial Backup Active D 7 D 5 Digital Bridge Configuration Full Backup Dial Backup Active D 8 D 6 Multipoint Full Dial Backup with Nondisruptive Diagnostics Configuration D 11 iv March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Table of Contents Figure Page D 7 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Did Backup NGUACIVE ERR RR ERE D 15 D 8 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Active Dial Backup Acte for Drops D 16 D 9 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Active Dial Backup Active tor Two Drops 2222526 REI C D 17 2 10 NMS Controlled Full Backup Configuration Dial Backup Not Active D 20 D 11 NMS Controlled Full Backup Configuration Dial Backup Active D 21 D 12 MCMP using Port Shar
9. Displ characters Poll List 4 Chang Add A 3610 A2 GB41 60 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table 5 12 Directory Entry and Password Characters Character Use 0 9 Dialing digit These are the only characters accepted by the Switched 56 DBM Tone dialing character Tone dialing character t Tone dial 2 Pulse dial 2 Wait for dial tone 2 Delimiter separating telephone number and callback directory pointer for use with callback security comma In a dial string Two second pause at the beginning of a password suppress display of all following characters invisible mode space Space readability character 3 underscore Required character for end of string marker Erase end of line 1 The colon character should not be entered from the NMS Not supported by Switched 56 DBMs 3 Space is not used for directory entries Phone The local telephone number Phone feature is used to store the local DBM s telephone number The DSU does not use this number in any of its operations rather the entry provides a convenient way to track the telephone number for future reference The local telephone number is available in the Local branch only if a DBM or DBM V DBM S or DBM D is installed It is always available in the Remote branch even though the remotely addr
10. rs gt Press the gt key to scroll other selections into view When PList is selected four selections are displayed unless the MCMP option is installed in which case there are five selections Table 5 11 lists the PList selection options and their function Table 5 11 Poll List Menu Options Selections Function Displ Displays each of the addresses in the poll list Clr Clears erases all addresses from the poll list Chang Selectively adds deletes or changes address in the poll list Add Adds the tributary to the control DSU s poll list For MCMP only and only appears for a tributary DSU Acq Polls all valid addresses and adds those addresses that respond to the poll list The following sections describe how a tributary DSU can add its network address to the control DSU s poll list as well as how a control DSU acquires a poll list Refer to COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide for additional Poll List information Adding Self to Poll List This PList selection is only available at a tributary DSU MCMP unit operating in NonD diagnostics The following menu displays after selecting PList then Add Add Self gt PList Execute CAS EJ 08 Add Self gt PList A Command 7 85 5 40 March
11. CLUSTER CONTROLLER 55600 BPS CLUSTER CONTROLLER 494 12889 02 Figure D 6 Multipoint Full Dial Backup with Nondisruptive Diagnostics Configuration If network failure occurs so that the multipoint drops are lost the 6800 Series NMS will display a Tributary Time out alarm for the tributary DSUs and a Facility Alarm for the control DSU The operator then issues an sf command and originate in the Standby Facility State field to the control DSU followed by a dial command then the sf command and originate in the Standby Facility State field to each of the control DBM Ss A routine command can be created to issue the command sequence automatically The control DSU reports by activating the digital bridge and switching to Bridge Timing Brdg Timing Auto Each DBM S responds by dialing a tributary Switched 56 DBM When connected the pair of DBMs perform a handshake and exchange passwords then enter Data mode ready to send data After the tributary DSU DBM has set up the call each DSU switches data to its DBM After all calls are completed full restoration is accomplished at 56 kbps The DBMs the DBM S and its tributary Switched 56 DBM provide valid call setup messages to the NMS If the NMS does not receive a valid call setup message from a DBM the NMS operator issues another dial command followed by the sf comman
12. M PTT 5 42 RN 5 42 Control Branc 252252 ba REE ecd VOS AR UR d 5 43 Transmiter REEL REFS De n ee bob CUI up des 5 44 MET PTT 5 45 ucc PIU Mr 5 46 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Overview This chapter identifies and discusses function and selection differences on the DSU when the TDM or MCMP optional feature is installed It also discusses operation of DBM Vs DBM Ss and DBM Ds which are used in digital bridge applications As with the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide this chapter follows the structure of the Menu Tree Appendix A discussing changes as they would appear as you operate the DSU from its diagnostic control panel DCP or SDCP NOTE Throughout this chapter shaded keys indicate the key you should press to display the next screen in the example provided or the next screen in the procedure Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide to understand how the DSU operates without the TDM or MCMP and for more control panel display key and menu function information Diagnostic Control Panels Diagnostic control panel DCP for the Model 3610 DSU shared diagnostic control panel SDCP for the Model 3611 DSU or async terminal operation does not
13. DDS Msg Clamp Enab Disab Diag Type NonD Disr Mixed None V 13 Signl Enab Disab TxElasStor Enab Disab 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 Enab Disab RxElastStor Enab Disab Disr Type 2500 2500 3600s 3600e Br56 Primary Core Yes 19 2 PowrLvl 6 0 10 DtrCallCon Orig tt Ansr Disab 64KScrambling On Off Switched 56 DBM only EchoCancel Enab Disab 64KLatchLpbk On Off ie ee with DSU firmware version 6 3x or greater Remote DBM 2 wire 4 wire AggrSwitch Enab Disab 2 wire Switched 56 DBM only AgSw Timing Int Aggr TNot available if a Switched 56 DBM V 54 Lpbk Disab tt Not available if a Primary Core is No Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode 3 of 3 General Options Value Backup Options Value Backup Directory Dial String DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Auto Bckup Enab Disab 1 RTS Cntrl FrcOn DTE Backup Dir Chang 1 10 3 CTS Ontrl Std RTS BckupOnOMI Enab Disab 4 LSD Lead STD Delay FrcOn AutoRestor Enab Disab 5 CTS Lead STD Delay FrcOn NtwkTimOut Chang min and sec 6 SystemStat Enab Disab RestorTimOut Chang min 7 Circ Assur Enab Disab TriesTimeOut Chang min 8 Tst Pattern AT amp T Std MultiCall Enab Disab 9 RespondRDL Enab Disab 10 LL by DTE Enab Disab Hardware Straps Value RL by DTE Enab Disab DDD Interfacet Permissive Programmable LPDA 2 Value Bilat Lpbk Enab Disab Frame
14. In the example below Port 3 has been in DTE Loopback for 2 hours 3 minutes and 21 seconds The DTE Loopback originated from the DCP DTE FP H S 2 03 21 Z P03Tst 2 gt Expanded Health and Status Expanded Health and Status Expan selection retrieves local DSU health and status information concerning a failed dialing attempt or an unsolicited disconnect after a successful connection To access the Expanded Health and Status from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e H S Results The second line of the Expanded Health and Status report displays one or more of the test or alarm messages Messages are listed in Appendix C of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator Guide 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Subnetwork Health and Status Subnetwork Health and Status Subn provides status information from a DSU s subnetwork all DSUs and DBMS assigned to that DSU s active poll list The downstream network addresses and current statuses are listed Use the F1 and F2 keys to page through the tributary addresses To access the Subnetwork Health and Status from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e H S e Subn Results
15. Assigning an Address to the Control DSU The following rules apply to assigning the LPDA 2 address to control DSUs 1 Link Segment Level 1 The control DSU closest to the NetView host is typically assigned the address 1 Figure 4 41 2 Link Segment Level 2 An extended control DSU if present is typically assigned the address 2 Figure 4 42 3 Valid Addresses Valid addresses for control DSUs range from 1 to 255 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 53 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units LINK SEGMENT LEVEL 1 LINK SEGMENT LEVEL 2 PRIMARY CIRCUIT EXTENDED CIRCUIT NETVIEW EXTENDED TRIBUTARY HOST SU CONTROL DSU DSU LPDA 2 ADDRESS 3270 REPRESENTS A CLUSTER CONTROLLER AND ITS ATTACHED TERMINALS CROSSOVER CABLE REFER TO APPENDIX FOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS 492 12986b 01 LPDA 2 CONTROL Figure 4 41 Sample Configuration and LPDA 2 Addressing Assigning an Address to the Tributary DSU NOTE For MCMP the channel assigned to Port 1 at the control 1 Valid Addresses Valid addresses for tributary DSU control tributary must DSUs range from 1 to 255 also be assigned to Port 1 at each tributary DSU The following rules apply to assigning the LPDA 2 address for tributary DSUs 2 Single DTE The tributary DSU address is set to the Physical Unit PU address of the attached terminal device Figures 4 41 4 42 and 4 43 This constraint is imposed by NetView 5 Digital Sha
16. 2 14 Removing the DSU from Hs Base uc aue based UR 2 15 Installing a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex 2 15 R assemblHmeg the Units saute pose Ern b bd 2 16 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 3 Model 3611 Installation OVETVIEW 3 1 Hardware taco 3 3 Soltwate Con BEADOR UR EUIS okay 3 4 Vellliealion Tesine uisi u EH eU cu QN ape du qb RU 3 5 Adding TDM or to an Installed Model 3611 DSU 3 6 Removing TDM or MCMP from an Installed Model 3611 DSU 3 13 4 Principles of Operation OVERVIEW 55522269949 bur hee edP Pe 4 2 Network Tebmmolo8 V aL eaae acier tiro tE 4 2 Modes Or Operation SSR EPI PIPER 4 4 Time Division Multiplex 4 a err RP DRE EP ke ERR 4 5 Multichannel Multipoint 4 21 Digital Br ds 24 5 OPEP dee 4 35 NMS CODITOD Rib RES 4 52 SNA Diasnostic EMOn ASE ulyuy rers 4 53 5 DSU Operations Maori AE 5 2 Diagnostic Control Panels 22 2 222 2222 2222 55222 222 5 bawa 5 2 Status Indicatots cs v2 bel ve Ub ERE 5 3 Menu SIFUCDUEG 2 e ERR 5 7 Sas EC nmm 5 8 Backup Branches ae bobo dcos opaco pir
17. ports are configured for EIA 232 operation before leaving the factory If you ordered a new Model 3610 DSU with a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex it may be a 2 or 6 port version You can configure each port independently to operate as either EIA 232 or V 35 interface Ports configured via the DCP an async terminal or an NMS through the Configuration Confg branch of the menu If you ordered a Model 3610 TDM DSD or MCMP DSD for digital sharing device DSD applications which only comes in a 6 port version turn the option card on the TDM or MCMP so all ports can operate as either EIA 232 or V 35 interfaces If you ordered a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex field installation upgrade and have a DSU with a firmware version less than 6 3x set the TDM or MCMP switch to change all ports from EIA 232 to V 35 operation they cannot be set via the DCP These ports should be set during the installation but they can be changed as needed provided you have the required V 35 adapter or adapters Only the 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex can be used with DSUs with firmware version DSU SW ver less than 6 3x For further information regarding ordering equipment see Appendix C Equipment List in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Option User s Guide Supplement 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units
18. 6 10 6 11 LXI c m START 6 2 6 3 6 4 MUX Func None RN LEGEND 2 DOES NOT APPEAR EXIT ONLY APPEARS WITH DBM OPTION WHEN CHANGING FROM BRIDGE MODE TO ANY OTHER MODE LOAD FROM FacC OR FacT WHEN CHANGING FROM ANY OTHER MODE TO BRIDGE MODE LOAD FROM FacB NOTE TABLES 6 1 THROUGH 6 18 CAN BE FOUND IN THE COMSPHERE 3600 SERIES DATA SERVICE UNITS 494 12833 04 MODELS 3610 AND 3611 OPERATOR S GUIDE Figure 5 13 Choosing Mode of Operation and Setting Configuration Options 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 35 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table 5 9 Complete List of MUX Setup Configuration Options Mode of Operation Option Function TDM MCMP Bridge MUX Funct Select mode of operation TDM MCMP X X X Bridge CBrdg or EBrdg or Basic None Bridge Rate Select bridge port speed all active ports Ignored Ignored X on the digital bridge are set to this speed Brdg Timing Select where timing will be taken from Ignored Ignored X during backup in Bridge mode Share DevA Enable digital sharing feature for one X x1 Must set to group Enab Lowest Port Select lowest port number in the first X x1 X digital sharing group Ports in Gp Select number of ports to be in the first X x1 X digital sharing group Port Ontrl Configure the first digital sharing group X x1 X with or without contention Share DevB Enable digital sharing feature fo
19. For a digital sharing group is created by assigning the same channel to each port in the group However for the SNA Diagnostic Interface option to recognize the digital sharing group the group must be specified by the Sharing Device A Share DevA configuration option DIGITAL SHARING GROUP 3270 3270 PU 7 PU 6 492 12992a 01 Figure 4 46 Digital Sharing in a Point to Point Circuit 4 58 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation NMS CARRIER NETVIEW HOST 2 42 4 DIGITAL SHARING LPDA 2 ADDRESS je LPDA 2 CONTROL 3270 PU 5 492 12993a 01 Figure 4 47 Digital Sharing in a Multipoint Circuit 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 59 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units NMS CARRIER DIGITAL SHARING NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS LPDA 2 CONTROL 492 12992 01 Figure 4 48 Digital Sharing in a TDM Circuit LPDA 2 Monitoring 4 60 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation CARRIER DIGITAL SHARING GROUP 0 NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS LPDA 2 CONTROL 42 492 12993 01 Figure 4 49 Digital Sharing Circuit LPDA 2 Monitoring 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 61 COMSPHERE
20. TO TRIBUTARY SITES VIA DCE ped PORT 5 PORT 6 AGGREGATE DATA PATH BRIDGE RATE DSU 490 12851 Figure 4 30 Broadcasting Data Through the Digital Bridge 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 37 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Diagnostic Considerations The digital bridge joins the aggregate data stream including data framing bits and diagnostics The diagnostic communication with tributary DSUs and DBMS is transparent to the digital bridge Commands for a tributary DSU or DBM can be addressed via the control DSU even when in backup The central site DBM Vs DBM Ss and DBM Ds should be configured for disruptive diagnostics For a central site bridge configuration nondisruptive mixed and disruptive diagnostic types 3600e Br56 are supported Rate adaption is not supported Therefore the DSU port speed must equal the DSU rate and the bridge rate must equal the DBM rate Also the Multipoint Symmetrical M PtS ymPrt configuration option must be disabled NOTE References to DBM in this guide also apply to a DBM V DBM S or DBM D Multipoint Backup The digital bridge capability of the TDM or MCMP option allows multipoint DDS circuits to have backup capability At the central site in addition to a TDM or MCMP DBM V or DBM S is required for each tributary DSU to be backed up Figure 4 31 Multipoint backup can provide dedicated dial backup on multipoint DDS circuits Figu
21. multipoint backup 4 39 MCMP circuit 4 22 restoration automatic manual dedicated backup switched 56 DBM D 27 MCMP backup switched 56 DBM14 28 device health and status 5 9 test 5 15 diagnostic considerations control DCP 1 2 nondisn pie multipoint fall dial backup D 10 D 11 path extension 4 11 SNA interface dial backup 1 4 P Ts all drops D 16 automatic partial D 7 FEP port sharing configuration D 31 full backup D 8 two drops D 17 onfiguration 4 55 mode multipoint 4 56 LPDA 2 4 56 NetView initiated 4 55 not active automatic partial D 6 FEP port sharing configuration D 30 NMS D 21 DTR capability 4 46 digital bridge 1 3 4 35 active broadcast 4 37 capability configuration scenarios 0 6 connector non modular TDM MCMP C 5 DBM V DBM S DBM D interface 4 46 switched LSD operation 4 46 DCE interface DSU interface 4 52 inactive central site bridging 4 44 interface cable 5 multipoint loopback remote 22 22 sharing 1 3 SLE LES point to point circuit LPDA 2 nh 4 60 test 5 255 26 results digital bridge DSU interface 4 52 directory 5 41 entry drop multipoint transmission 4 3 DSD digital sharing device 2 1 DSU control address 4 53 digital bridge capability disconnecting DTE connection interface digital bridge 4 52 LPDA 2 interoperability
22. operation overhead com position 4 23 signal flow 4 24 status indicators 5 5 menu mode of operation 5 7 options control branch poll list 5 40 selections backup branch 5 13 structure 5 7 mode 4 415 33 bridge 4 41 5 33 configuration options model 3610 DSU with 2 9 modular pin connector ports 6 C 13 switch locations 2 3 with SNA Diagnostic Interface 1 6 with TDM or MCMP 3611 DSU faceplate front panel high density connector ports MCMP faceplate 5 4 removing 13 status indicators TDM MCMPJ 5 5 faceplate TDM MCMP high density connector C 9 switch locations 3 3 with SNA Diagnostic Interface 1 6 with TDM or MCMP 1 8 modular DSU V 35 ddapter with TDM MCMP pin connector V 35 C 13 TDM MCMP installation switch locations multiplex TDM 1 2 TDM MCMP 4 56 3610 A2 GB41 60 Index 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units multiplexing digital sharine 57 point to point TDM time division 4 5 multipoint async compatibility 4 O async compatible 4 9 network backup addressing architecture circuit digital sharing MCMP 4 22 DDS circuit partial backup 4 39 dial backup 4 56 LPDA 2 4 56 digital bridge 4 35 full backup nondisruptive diagnostics D 10 mul
23. the tributary DSUs will automatically restore the DDS network when the minutes specified for the Restore Time Out RestorTimOut configuration option expire Pertinent configuration options for the central site bridge a DBM V and a tributary DSU DBM that support the configuration scenario just described follow Please note that DBM Vs here should be configured the same only the passwords and telephone numbers should differ The same holds true for the tributary DSU DBMs TRIBUTARY DTE FAILURE TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE 494 12891 01 Figure D 5 Digital Bridge Configuration Full Backup Dial Backup Active D 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Configuration Options Set the central site bridge configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct CBrdg Bridge Rate ZDSU Brdg Timing Int Share DevA Enab Lowest DCE Ports in Gp 4 Port Cntrl Host Share DevB Disab Prt2 through Prt4 Prt5 and Prt6 N A RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab TxElastStor Disab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Mixed Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt Trib TimOut enter amount of time e Gen DTE Port EIA232 Set configuration options for automatic partial backup using the DB
24. 1 and Aggr are the only valid choices 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 25 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units BASIC MODE TRANSMITTER GENERATOR COMPARATOR RECEIVER LOCAL DSU DTE NETWORK INTERFACE TIME TOT ERROR ERR SECS or MCMP MODE PORT 4 SELECTED TRANSMITTER DTE INTERFACE PORT 1 B RECEIVER E DTE INTERFACE TDM MCMP PORT 2 GENERATOR COMPARATOR TOT ERROR ERR SECS LOCAL DSU NETWORK RECEIVER DTE INTERFACE TRANSMITTER REMOTE DSU DTE INTERFACE PORT 1 TRANSMITTER TDM MCMP DTE INTERFACE 2 PORT4 LOOPBACK REMOTE DSU 492 12880 01 Figure 5 10 Digital Test 5 26 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Results When the message Command Complete is displayed any key except the 2 key returns you to the Digital Test submenu where the Dsply and Clr selections appear If Clr is selected while the test is running the test starts again DBM DT Final A Err Secs tej J gt If the test 15 still running top line displays Active instead of Final and the results are updated in real time Table 5 6 defines the information displayed after a Digital Test is completed Table 5 6 Digital Test Results For an example of Digital Test results refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 a
25. COMSPHERE 3600 SERIES DATA SERVICE UNITS MODELS 3610 AND 3611 TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXER MULTICHANNEL MULTIPOINT AND DIGITAL BRIDGE OPTIONS APPLICATIONS GUIDE Document No 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options Applications Guide 3610 A2 GB41 60 7th Edition March 1999 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty there Select Service amp Support Warranty Registration Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Pu
26. Ending the backup session causes the control DSU to deactivate the bridge and DSU timing 56 kbps becomes the DDS clock source once again Each DBM V signals its tributary that it is dropping the call and hangs up Each tributary then switches back to the DDS network and the DDS network is again functional Between the time that the bridge is deactivated and the DDS network is reestablished errors occur on those tributaries still in backup Pertinent configuration options for the central site bridge the extended bridge a DBM V and a tributary DSU DBM supporting this application follow Please note that all DBM Vs here should be configured the same only the passwords and telephone numbers should differ The same holds true for the tributary DSU DBMs D 22 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Configuration Options Set the central site bridge configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct CBrdg Bridge Rate 14 4 Brdg Timing Int Share DevA Enab Lowest DCE Ports in Gp 6 Port Cntrl Host Share DevB Disab Prt2 through Prt6 RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type 3600 e Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt Trib TimOut enter amount of time Diag Conn
27. March 1999 5 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Backup Branch The Backup Bckup branch controls operation of the point to point dial backup feature The Bckup selection only appears when a DBM V 32 DBM 4 wire Switched 56 DBM or 2 wire Switched 56 DBM is installed Central Site Bridge CBrdg is enabled or Aggregate Switch AggrSwitch is enabled TOP LEVEL MENU Central Site Bridge or Aggregate Switch DBM Installed Central Site Bridge or Aggregate Switch 2 AggSw DrBU DBM DBM V Aggr Bridge Inactive DBM S Switch in Full Bridge DBM D Activated Backup Aggr Sw Partial Backup ph eee lec Idle Mode Standby Mode Backup Mode 7 Bkup Dial DrBU gt DDS l Dial Dial Idle Standby Backup Mode Mode Mode Standby Mode Disc Dial Idle Dial Mode Backup Mode 494 12971 04 The DBM DBM V DBM S DBM D section discusses the full set of available commands when a DBM is installed Multipoint dial backup requires a TDM or MCMP to be installed with the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP configured as a central site bridge MUX Funct CBrdg with an associated DBM V DBM S or DBM D for each remote drop refer to the Bridge section For additional DBM operation information refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Op
28. Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 J4 Port 4 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table C 1 3 of 3 Time Division Multiplexer Connector Used with Non Modular TDM se 25 Position Socket D Sub P1 Pin Port Pin 46 J2 06 47 J2 17 48 J2 05 49 J2 03 50 J5 06 51 J5 05 52 J5 17 53 J5 24 54 J5 20 55 J6 15 56 J6 05 57 J6 02 58 J6 04 59 J6 20 60 J6 24 1 J2 Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 44 Port 4 C 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments 6 FT 3 HUE 1 FT PLUG TO PLUG FIVE 25 PIN EIA 232 HIGH DENSITY CONNECTORS CONNECTOR P2 P6 493 12887 01 Figure 2 Digital Bridge Interface Cable Feature Number 3600 2 501 Table C 2 1 of 3 Digital Bridge Connector Used with Non Modular TDM MCMP 25 Position Plug D Sub P1 Pin Port Pin 01 NC2 NC2 02 P3 24 03 P3 04 04 P3 20 05 NC2 NC2 06 P3 17 07 P3 06 08 P2 07 09 P3 08 10 P4 04 11 P2 04 12 P5 07 13 P3 02 1 2 Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 J4 Port 4 2 NC No Connection 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table C 2 2 of 3 Digital Bridge Connector Used with Non Modular TDM MCMP Hi BEDA Conn ector 25 Position Plug D Sub P1 Pin Port Pin 14 P2 03 15 NC NC 16 P2
29. To continue with your change press Z key to return to the Load Save menu selections LEDs Port Load Save Press the F2 Save key to change the monitored port to a new selection You must select Save to have the entry accepted es Results The DSU displays the following indicating that the command has been put into effect Save LEDs Port 2 A Command Le 85 External Leads Through the External Leads ExtL selection you can display the state of four general purpose leads on the EIA 232 D V 24 Port 1 interface Pins 12 and 13 for output control leads and Pins 19 and 23 for input alarm leads If the configuration option External Leads Ext Leads is set to ExtLd you can change the state of the two output leads from the DCP or from a 6700 or 6800 Series NMS If the DSU s diagnostic protocol is ADp and the CCN by External Leads CCN by EL configuration option has been enabled a control DSU reports any changes to the four leads to the 6700 or 6800 Series NMS as part of its health and status poll response Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide for additional information and for examples 5 46 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Data Service Unit Menu A 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 A 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TOP LE
30. 1 5 opening 2 4 2 13 B 6 switched 56 backup TDM capability 1 2 tributary address DTE digital bridge capability drop 4 3 lead status codes loopback status 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 Index 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units EIA 232 V 24 TDM MCMP connector modular standalone EIA 232 D V 24 connector 10 elastic store per port 1 3 electrical connection 2 8 end to end test 5 27 5 28 results equipment warranty and support expanded health and status extended bridee automatic partial backup configuration D 15 D 16 D 17 full backup network management controlled circuit 4 18 4 54 TDM external DBU 1 3 dial backup leads faceplate TDM fallback multispeed operation 1 5 features optional 1 2 standard 1 2 FEP port sharing 1 3 444 144 1 15 1 32 configuration dial backup active D 31 MCMP 4 27 D 25jD 26 flex interface switch 2 6 framing 6104 6 in band 4 6 management channel 4 23 front panel model 3611 6 full backup extended bridge option support G H government requirements 1 9 hardware expanded subnetwork IBF in band framing 4 6 in band framing 4 6 secondary channel transport 4 23 initialization 4 25 installing modular non modular TOM MCMP inte
31. Chang BckupOnCMI Enab Disab Gade Chang AUtoReStor Endb Disab Not available if a Switched 56 DBM NtwkTimOut Chang min and sec tt Not available if Primary Core is No RestorTimOut Chang min ES Switched 6 DEM only TriesTimeOut Chang min Appears when non Flex TDM installed or 6 port Flex MultiCall Enab Disab with DSU firmware version less than 6 3x Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode 1 of 3 Date Location Local Phone No Device Local Address DBM Installed SerialNo Tributary Network Address SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Installed MUX Setup Value Prt1 Options Value Prt2 Options Value MUX Funct MCMP TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg None Async Sync Enab Disab Disab Disab Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Lowest Port 1 2 3 4 5 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Ports in Gp 2 3 4 5 6 Stop Bits 1 2 x Port Cntrl Host DSD Overspeed 1 25 2 5 FrcOn DTE Share DevB Enab Disab RTS FrcOn DTE TxCarrSel Const Cntrl
32. Control Branch Menu Options Menu Selection TxCtl Enables or disables the DSU s transmitter or the DBM s call setup or answer capability Purpose LEDs Selects whether the port or aggregate data stream is monitored on the faceplate LEDs ExtL Provides status and control of two external input leads and two output leads available for optional customer assignment 1 Only applies to or MCMP applications and only in Local mode Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide for additional information and examples DSU and DBM subbranches are valid for Local mode only Devic and Ports are displayed for Remote mode Also if General configuration option Ext Leads is set to ExtLd Chang is not displayed 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 43 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Transmitter Control Transmitter Control TxCtl allows you to enable or disable the DSU s transmitter DDS core the DBM s transmitter the DBM s call setup and answering capability or to enable or disable individual ports when operating in TDM or MCMP mode You can also choose which of the six ports is to have its circuit leads monitored When the DSU transmitter is disabled the following is possible e When a DSU is disabled it responds to tests Aborting a test clears the test but the unit remains disabled e A DSU in test clears the test when
33. DSU s EIA 232 D V 24 interface connector Port 1 provide for 2 port or 6 port multiplexing or digital sharing A Model 3610 DSU with TDM Flex or MCMP Flex may be a 2 or 6 port version You can configure each port independently to operate as either an EIA 232 or V 35 interface Ports are configured via the DCP an async terminal or an NMS When a port other than Port 1 is used for V 35 operation a cable adapter is required feature number 3000 F1 510 When the TDM DSD or MCMP DSD EIA 232 V 35 is installed you can select either 232 or V 35 interface compatibility for Ports 2 through 6 by changing the option card Model 3611 with TDM or MCMP The Model 3611 DSU with TDM or MCMP consists of a Model 3611 circuit card and a TDM or MCMP circuit card that are physically connected Figure 1 2 As a unit they fill two adjacent slots in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier There are two types of Model 3611 TDM or MCMP circuit cards non modular and modular The non modular TDM or MCMP provides a single multiport interface connector mounted directly onto the rear of the TDM or MCMP circuit card The EIA 232 D V 24 or V 35 interface connector at the rear of the DSU is Port 1 the TDM or MCMP multiport interface connector provides five additional 232 ports 2 through 6 special multiport cable fans out from the single multiport interface connector to five individual EIA 25 pin DTE connectors Together with the Port 1
34. Diag DBM Diag Type Disr RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt DBM PrtSp Kbps 56 AutoAnswer Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Primary Core Yes DTRCallCon Orig EchoCancel Disab e Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl FrcOn CTS Cntrl Std AntiStream Disab LSD Lead Std CTS Lead Std DSR FrcOn Disab D 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Bkup Auto Bckup Disab BckupOnCMI Disab AutoRestor Disab Set the configuration options for multipoint dial backup of a tributary DSU DBM configuration as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic Mode DSU Rate Kbps 56 PrtSp Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD Disr Type Br56 Diag DBM Diag Type NonD RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Trib LinkConfig M Pt Resp Period 1 M Pt SymPrt Disab DBM PrtSp Kbps 56 AutoAnswer Enab TxElasStor Disab RxElasStor Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Primary Core No Gen DTE Port V 35 RTS Cntrl DTE CTS Cntrl Std Bkup Auto Bckup Disab BckupOnCMI Disab AutoRestor Disab LPDA LPDA 2 Disab 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Automatic Partial Backup Using an Extended Bridge The assumed
35. EE Const Coe TxCarrSel Const Cntrl RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark PCC Buffer RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark PCC Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments DTR Alarm Enab Disab Fast Stor Enab Disab RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 TR Aan Enab Disab ES Alarm Enab Disab l PSR Freon Enab Disab Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang 0 desyne terminal 270 100 DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab Extend Chan Yes No DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt5 Prt6 Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No DIET zin Mii Upstrm Port Prit Prt2 Prt3 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode 2 of 3 Prt6 Options Value PrtSp Options DSU Value Diagnostic DBM Value gt
36. ERE ee bo kes 5 12 Tesi Brane Se Row oe eb DER P aes ee ae tae 5 14 Configuration 5 31 Control Branch 5 43 Appendices Ae DataSetvice Unit Menus u u usr xo ERR E PIPER TO 1 B Configuration Worksheets B 1 Pin Assignments solet b EE Pikes bok REDE C 1 D Configuration 5 2222 gt 2225 5222 55 be D 1 Index ii March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Table of Contents List of Figures Figure Page IS Model 3610 DSU wath TDM or trn oet od oe dob 1 7 1 22 Model 3611 DSU with TDM or MCMP 1 8 2 1 Model 3610 TDM Flex or MCMP Flex Switch Locations 2 3 2 2 Model 3610 TDM DSD or MCMP DSD Circuit Card Switch Locations 2 3 2 3 Opening the DSU re Ub hoes 2 4 2 4 Assembling Disassembling the 2 5 2 5 Changing TDM Flex or MCMP Flex Interface Compatibility 2 6 2 6 Changing TDM DSD or MCMP DSD Interface Compatibility 2 7 2 7 Model 36 0 DSU wath TDM or MCMP RSG Lee RSS 2 9 2 9 Disconuechng tbe DSU uu uu g EHE OE eR ERES 2 14 3 1 Non Modular TDM MCMP Circuit Card Switch Locations 3 3 3 2 Modular TDM MCMP Circuit Card Switch Locations 3
37. Enab Disab Prt1 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 Options Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab Diag Type NonD Disr Mixed None AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Prt2 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 Stop Bits 1 2 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab RemoteDiag V 54 Enhan 2500 Prt3 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 Overepsed 29 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab RTS Ontrl ea Prt4 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 TxCarrSel Const Cntrl 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab Diagnostic General Value RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark Options Prt5 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 CREER PCC Buffer Enab Disab 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab Position ntrl Trib Elast Stor Enab Disab Prt6 48 38 4 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 7 2 LinkConfig Pt Pt RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments 4 8 2 4 1 2 Disab Resp Period 15 9 10 DTR Alarm Enab Disab Underspeed Disab Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Trib TimOut Chang secto min Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Diag Conn CC DC DSR Enab Disab DN JH Link Delay 05 1s 25 5s 105 206 50 Prit 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 DSR Ts D Sron st aoe 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 95 15 29 98 108 205 508 Extend Chan Yes
38. No Disab Packet Delay Os 15 25 55 Upstim Port Pett Pran Rri Pris Pre Prt2 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 Fast Sel Enab Disab DTE Port EIA232 V 35 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab Prt3 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 PrtSP Chanl Value 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 DBM Options Value Disab Rate Kbps t 14 4 12 0 9 6 4 8 2 4 AssgmntPrti D E F G H None Prt4 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 TxClkSource t Int RXC DSU AssgmntPrt2 A B C D E F G H None 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab CarrLossDisc T Yes No AssgmntPrt3 A B C D E F G H None z AB GDEEGHN Prt5 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 Auto Retrain T Yes No SDT s s Exin 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Single Rate Yes No B AssgmntPrt5 A B C D E F H None isab AuloAnswer Enab Disab AssgmntPrt6 A B C D E F G H None Prt6 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 TxElasStor Enab Disab Disab RxElasStor Enab Disab Underspeed Disab Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Call Setup None Pswrd Cllbk Alarm DSU Options Value 3i SEDE RxPwd Chang lagnostic Rate Kpbs 56 Options Value TxPwd Chang TxClkSource Int
39. and takes its timing from external timing on e When a failure in the backbone DDS network occurs all DSUs recognize a network fault The NMS displays a Facility Alarm for the control DSU and a Tributary Time out alarm for each tributary DSU and DBM e tis assumed that a failure in the DDS network is not between the control DSU and the central office The control DSU still receives valid DDS clock If not receiving valid DDS clock the central site bridge would have to be put into Backup mode manually As aresult of a failure in the backbone DDS network the control DSU reports a Facility Alarm to the NMS The tributary DSUs show an Out of Service message on their DCPs and the Network Timeout timer is started When minute elapses each of the seven tributary DBMs places a call to their respective DBM Vs Each tributary DSU DBM has been paired with a DBM V that is associated with the control DSU digital bridge at the central site The tributary s Backup Dir configuration option is a pointer to the telephone number stored in its Backup Directory for its associated DBM V each DBM calls a different DBM V After the pairs of DBMs exchange passwords the tributary DSU DBMs enter Data mode ready to send data After the tributary DSU DBM has set up the call each DSU switches the DTE s data to its DBM As each associated DBM V enters Data mode the data is passed from the DBM V to the digital bridge The digital bridge
40. key to display additional measurements one display at a time Terminal Power Terminal Power TPwr shows the status of the connected DTE s EIA 232 D or V 35 interface The DSU checks the state of the request to send RTS lead and reports the DTE powered ON if the voltage is approximately less than 3V or greater than 3V for both 232 and 35 interfaces To access the Terminal Power report from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e TPwr Results NOTE The Terminal Power report is only generated for the DTE connected to the DSU Port 1 when a TDM or is installed The following report displays for the local or remote device selected If power is detected on the RTS the second line displays On If no power is detected on the RTS lead the second line displays Off Prt1 Term Power A On le Table 5 4 Circuit Quality Measurements Measurements Information Displayed Range Of Possible Values S N ratio Signal to noise ratio dB 9 dB to 27 dB Sig Level Signal level dBm 0 dBm to 50 dBm BitErrR Bit error rate factor of 10 e g 10 1006 10 00 to 10 71 RndTrip Roundtrip delay ms 23 ms 1700 ms 110 to 06 1 error in a million bits 109 A roundtrip delay of less than 23 ms is reported as 23 ms 3610 A2 GB41 60
41. version less than 6 3x use the S1 switch to change the TDM or MCMP port interface operation EIA 232 or V 35 If you have a TDM DSD or MCMP DSD use the option card to change the TDM or MCMP port interface operation EIA 232 or V 35 Follow this procedure to open the DSU and separate it from the TDM or MCMP refer to Figures 2 3 and 2 4 Select the appropriate procedure based upon the type of WITH TDM FLEX OR MCMP FLEX TDM or MCMP you have either the switch Flex or option card DSD NOTE If the unit has already been installed make sure that the unit is disconnected from its power source before changing the Flex interface switch position p Procedure With the unit upside down use a small flat head screwdriver to release the four snap tabs holding the base in place refer to Figure 2 3 2 Turn the unit over while being careful not to allow any cable to be pulled free of the connectors SERIAL SNAP TAB NUMBER 005009009 L 1 0 E ZZ aasan 0 0 s e pr SNAP 5 496 14518 01 Figure 2 3 Opening the DSU 2 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation 3 Disconnect the keypad flat cable from the DSU circuit card by squeezing the latches on each side of the cable and gently pulling up refer to F
42. 06 17 P2 17 18 P3 07 19 P2 08 20 P5 03 21 P5 04 22 NC NC 23 P5 08 24 P6 07 25 P6 04 26 P6 20 27 P6 24 28 P6 02 29 NC NC 30 P4 07 31 P4 24 32 P4 03 33 J4 08 34 NC NC 35 P4 02 36 NC NC 37 NC NC 38 P4 17 39 P4 06 40 NC NC 41 03 42 P4 20 43 P5 02 44 NC2 NC2 1 2 Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 Port 4 2 NC No Connection C 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 2 3 of 3 Digital Bridge Connector Used with Non Modular TDM MCMP Hi ector 25 Position Plug D Sub P1 Pin Port Pin 45 NC2 NC2 46 P2 20 47 P2 24 48 NC2 NC2 49 P2 02 50 P5 20 50 P5 20 51 NC2 NC2 52 P5 24 53 P5 17 54 P5 06 55 NC2 NC2 56 NC2 NC2 57 P6 03 58 P6 08 59 P6 06 60 P6 17 1 2 Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 J4 Port 4 2 NC No Connection 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units POSITION 1 POSITION 30 POSITION 31 TDM MCMP CARD REAR VIEW POSITION 60 491 12884 Figure C 3 Pin Locations on the 60 Position High Density Connector of the Non Modular Carrier Mounted TDM MCMP Circuit Card C 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 3 60 Position High Density Connector TDM MCMP Ports 2 through 6 for Mo
43. 1 PSTN 9600 BPS TRIBUTARY j 1 CROSSOVER lt SSS CABLES PSTN 9600 BPS ww f TRIBUTARY DTE 1 PSTN 2 9600 BPS f TRIBUTARY DTE 4 E PSTN 9600 BPS f TRIBUTARY DTE 3 f TRIBUTARY DTE 9600 BPS DIGITAL f TRIBUTARY 00 BF Ld 9600 BPS 7 CROSSOVER 3 CABLES DBM V 5 n PSTN 9600 BPS CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg DBM V EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg 6 492 12896 02 DBM V 7 Figure D 8 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Active Dial Backup Active for A Drops D 16 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios CARRIER DDS 9200 9600 5 FEP DSU ww ff TRIBUTARY DTE 1 DIGITAL BRIDGE TRIBUTARY DTE j 2 CABLES lt myw DTE om j asas J ff TRIBUTARY DTE 4 b TRIBUTARY FAILURES t DBM 5 p eii Fy ff TRIBUTARY j e DIGITAL ww ff TRIBUTARY PSTN CROSSOVER j EE CABLES 5 PSTN 9600 BPS CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg DBM V EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg 6 494 12896a DBM V 7 Figure D 9 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Active Dial Backup Active for Two Drops 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 17 COMSPHERE 3600 Series D
44. 11 Network and LADS Connections receding eee 2 11 DSU DIE Gon ecHoll 4l nee ceed USE et eat a et ate 2 11 Testing esee Re SENE Up S e d eR Res 2 12 Adding a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex to an Installed Model 3610 050 2 13 Getting Stated cone Read c Reels NOU ED EE 2 14 Removing the DSU from Rogo ue a ene ei elena S 2 15 Installing a TDM Elex or MCMP Elex 2 15 Reassembling the Umit GE ER er E Ge a Lage SR dead dey 2 16 Overview The Model 3610 DSU designed for desktop operation is delivered with default hardware strap settings and factory installed software options ready to connect to the network The unit is configured as a tributary DSU for operation at 9 6 kbps on a point to point circuit with diagnostic protocol set to ADp When TDM MCMP is installed Port 1 of the DSU is configured to operate at 9 6 kbps with the TDM or MCMP capability enabled all other ports are disabled For the Model 3610 the additional ports provided by the TDM or MCMP are 25 pin D type connectors which require an interface between each 25 pin D type connector and V 35 connector Order a V 35 adapter feature number 3000 F1 510 for each TDM or MCMP port that you intend to operate as a V 35 interface
45. 2 5 Prt6 If All is selected set of Prt3 configuration option values will be written to each port Prt1 through Prt6 in TDM or MCMP mode and Prt2 through Prt6 in Bridge mode If a port is selected the Prt3 configuration option values will only be written to the selected port 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 37 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table 5 10 1 of 2 Complete List of MUX Port Configuration Options Mode of Function Option Function TDM MCMP Bridge AsyncSync Configure the port as asynchronous or X x Forced to synchronous Disab Async Rate Select an asynchronous rate for the port x Ignored AsyncBit Char Specify the length of the asynchronous x1 Ignored character including the parity bit but excluding the start and stop bits Stop Bits Specify the number of stop bits in the X x1 Ignored asynchronous character Overspeed Specify the overspeed percentage for the X x1 Ignored asynchronous DTE port RTS Cntrl For the port select whether RTS is to be X X X Forced On or whether it is to follow the external RTS lead TxCarrSel Enable the TDM or MCMP circuitry to X X Forced to simulate switched carrier operation used Const by the V 13 protocol on an individual channel this operation is also called pseudo controlled carrier PCC mode RxCarrSel Enable the receiving DSU to look for V 13 X X Forced to codes on an in
46. 24 11 S Transmit Data TXD 23 22 R T Received Data RXD 15 2 U W Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source 16 3 V X Receiver Signal Element Timing DCE Source 14 1 Y Transmitter Signal Element Timing Source 9 HH Positive dc Test voltage 10 KK Negative dc Test Voltage 25 NN Test Mode TM Shell Shield 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 13 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 26 PIN HIGH DENSITY D CONNECTOR SIX 25 PIN SOCKET CONNECTORS 493 13970 01 Figure C 5 6 Port Connector Module Part Number 870 1700 0011 C 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 7 EIA 232 V 24 TDM MCMP Connector Modular and Standalone Ports 2 through 6 Circuit Name Pin Function EIA 232 CCITT V 25 2 BA 103 Transmit Data TXD 3 BB 104 Received Data RXD 4 CA 105 Request to Send RTS 5 CB 106 Clear to Send CTS 6 CC 107 Data Set Ready DSR 7 AB 102 Signal Ground SG 8 CF 109 Received Line Signal Detect LSD 9 Positive Test Voltage 12 112 Data Signal Rate Selector DCE Source 15 DB 114 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DCE Source 17 DD 115 Receiver Signal Element Timing DCE Source 20 CD 108 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR 24 DA 113 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source 1 EIA 232 refers to EIA 232 D without the
47. 3600 Series Data Service Units 4 62 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations gc A C 5 2 COMPO LP ATL u Ir bani E tis a SP a a S eg a hua SW 5 2 Janis ua AS u 5 3 Menu SHUCHIIC 5 0 ants EE ESAE NI RUE WEE E 5 7 Menus and Mode 5 7 Local Remote Menu 22 225422 aw e Reda err meer Y eS eee eh 5 7 Status Brane sass e aret Hrs 5 8 PPP 5 9 Device Plea lib ang Status esa ndr geh h auqa ee oe INR 5 9 Expanded Health and cece caw Re ee RR 5 9 Subnetwork Health and Stats RR e RE RI T OR 5 10 PTE ECC CM EET 5 10 Qualibi cos cas x RAP qid d S uy ape it eec Qa eet 5 11 POWT cosas cx eb UR ba SEINE ER p queda 5 11 Backup Brei MERE 5 12 DBM DBM V DBM S DBM D une E DEORE RAES 5 12 Aesstegale aie gow awa eaS 5 13 E usasapa E E eee os 5 13 MNS SEE M s E was q Wa qaa mkuu ue ak 5 14 ABOE 1552 Typ
48. 3610 DSUs with the digital bridge capability all port connectors are individual and a separate crossover cable is required for each connector The Digital Bridge DSU Interface section of this chapter describes how the crossover cable completes the communication path between a digital bridge port and its associated DSU 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 49 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DSU TRIBUTARY jao joooos DSU TRIBUTARY DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE 55555 DSU TRIBUTARY nimm p ini FIVE DSUs DEDICATED DSU MULTIPOINT LADs TRIBUTARY DSU TRIBUTARY uis 4 WIRE NONLOADED METALLIC PAIRS CROSSOVER CABLES ARE USED WITH MODULAR UNITS DSU WITH DIGITAL BRIDGE 492 12866 01 CONTROL Figure 4 38 Bridged LADS Operation 4 50 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Bridged LADS Architecture One TDM circuit card operating in Bridge mode can support up to six tributary DSUs Figure 4 39 In the transmit direction data from the controlling DTE is broadcast to all ports in the digital sharing group In the receive direction data from a tributary site flows through the aggregate data path to the controlling DTE To establish the data paths shown in Figu
49. 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options User s Guide Supplement Should more detail about how the DSU operates be required the following additional documentation may be ordered 3610 A2 GB91 3610 A2 GN32 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide Other product documentation includes the following 3000 A2 GA31 3000 A2 GB41 3610 A2 GB42 6700 A2 GB41 6700 A2 GY31 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual COMSPHERE 48 Vdc Central Office Power Unit Installation Guide COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Services Units Models 3610 and 3611 Secondary Channel Applications Supplement COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System User s Guide Security Manager Feature Supplement COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System User s Guide 6800 A2 GB31 999 100 1961S COMSPHERE 6800 Series Network Management System Communications Products Support Command Reference Manual DATAPHONE II 2600 Series Data Service Units User s Manual Contact your sales representative for additional product documentation Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals Reference Documents AT amp
50. 4 Remove the rear connector plate STANDOFF e POST STANDOFF FLAT WASHERS TDM e FACEPLATE FLAT WASHERS 492 13859 01 Figure 3 5 Modular or MCMP Installation 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units To install the 6 port connector module and add the TDM or MCMP option to a Modular 3611 DSU gt Procedure 1 At the rear of the carrier set the tabs on the 6 port connector module into the slotted grooves on the carrier s backplane Note that the connector module occupies two slot positions Make sure the connector module uses the same slot positions intended for the modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP circuit cards Loosely fasten the screws attached to the connector module allowing for slight adjustment that may be needed when installing the modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP circuit cards The two screws on the connector module must be alternately fastened On the ESD workpad insert the two plastic snaplock posts into their respective holes See Figure 3 5 Attach the four metal standoff posts to the DSU with the four Phillips head screws and flat washers Tighten the screws until the standoff posts fit snugly against the circuit card Do not overtighten On the ESD workpad orient the DSU to its upright position with the faceplate over the edge of the table so the latches hang over and pointing toward you just as it would si
51. 60 March 1999 3 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Press the latches to secure the DSU and TDM or MCMP circuit cards in the carrier to prevent the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit from being dislodged during installation of the DTE interfaces Rotate the circuit pack lock on the DSU circuit card faceplate back into the closed position and tighten the screw Power Up Routine When power is applied the DSU e Determines what options are installed DBM or MUX the TDM or MCMP e Runs a Device Test on the unit and each of the installed options During the tests all indicators on the DCP light briefly and the message Power Up Tests appears on the liquid crystal display LCD e Displays the results of each test momentarily as Pass Fail or Abrt These tests take about 20 seconds to complete Abrt indicates that the Device Test was aborted because a network loopback was in progress during the power up procedure If a TDM or MCMP is installed MUX is displayed as Pass or Fail If the DSU DBM TDM or MCMP MUX fails the power up test gt Procedure 1 Reinstall the factory configuration options use the FacT configuration for a tributary or FacC for a control 2 Confirm the installed hardware options DBM TDM or 3 the Device Test from the SDCP Press the 2 key to return to the top level menu then select Local Test DSU Devic If the test passes continue wit
52. Bkup CARRIER AGGREGATE DATA PATH 56 KBPS SWITCHED 56 KBPS NETWORK command When this is done the DSU will transmit the aggregate data stream including data framing and diagnostics through the aggregate port To terminate dial backup send a DrBU command to the DBM S and the DSU NOTE During full backup switching for aggregate versions only diagnostic commands are routed over the aggregate port to the remote DSU or DBM Only two tests are available to test the DDS facility Digital Test DT and Bit Error Rate Test BERT SW 56 DBM 492 13933 Figure 4 15 Case 5 Aggregate Switched Backup for Circuits Configuration 4 20 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation 1 1 1 capability provides up to six user M Itich an nel M Iti pel nt selectable full duplex channels plus a channel for The MCMP capability reduces the number of parallel diagnostic transport Any of the user selectable channels multipoint digital private lines required by independent can be assigned to any of the six ports e g Channel A applications Merging applications onto a single assigned to Port 3 By assigning channels to ports at both communications circuit reduces line DCE and the control and tributary DSUs an independent virtual maintenance costs Figures 4 16 and 4 17 The multipoint circuit can be built for each channel 3600 Series DSUs wit
53. CC M Pt SymPrt Disab e Gen DTE Port V 35 Set the extended bridge configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode MUX Setup MUX Funct EBrdg Bridge Rate 14 4 Brdg Timing Prt1 Share DevA Enab Lowest Port 2 Ports in Gp 3 Share DevB Disab Prt2 through Prt4 Prt5 and Prt6 N A RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab TxElastStor Disab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Disr Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt Gen DTE Port EIA232 CTS Cntrl Std 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Set configuration options for multipoint full dial backup using the DBM V as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Mode e Diag DBM Diag Type Disr RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt e DBM Rate Kbps 14 4 PrtSp Kbps 14 4 TxClkSource Ext CarrLossDisc Yes Auto Retrain Yes Single Rate Yes AutoAnswer Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Primary Core Yes DTRCallCon Orig e Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl FrcOn CTS Std e Bkup Auto Bckup Disab AutoRestor Disab Set the configuration options for multipoint full dial backup of a tributary DSU as follows C
54. COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 3 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation OVERVIEW ETC 4 2 Network TesmilolggV 5 eee terea b hk Ub 4 2 Transmission ulus e eret ti ma m ela edere olea sa Sas aleve 4 2 Multipoint Transmission ost ete mec re d eb x E OI C V IA 4 3 Modes oF Operation Renee bh bani terse aes aye eee Bead SSE ees 4 4 BASIC UGS ise ata ood 4 4 TOM MOJE 5050 ee 4 4 MEME ines da M 4 4 Bridge UO 4 4 Time Division Muluplexitig veges sever RI ee Oa Reb eee 4 5 Speed Characteristics e cereis reper Re Ia e EE eR ERE RW ONU EE E KA REA Y RR E 4 6 Asynchronous and Synchronous Sources 4 6 In Band Framing and Undersp ed Channel 42 2 2 e rn RR ERROR eR RR ERE 4 6 TOM Architecture erro D eProps e Qr p eeu ere op b bac elle dodici 4 7 TOM AM CANONS MEC 4 8 Single Port Async Svn Support terme Ret IE E y FERRE 4 8 Mul plexing E X oss gx Ere IE cese vA 4 10 TDM Backbone Circuit with Extensions bb 4 1 Diagnostic Path EXtSHBION sue dA E CU
55. COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide for these tables These tables are arranged by option set and presented in menu tree order They describe the function or purpose of each configuration option in the set and describe each possible selection NOTE Configuration Option Worksheets in Appendix B summarize the configuration options in each option set by mode of operation You may want to record configuration option selections on one of these worksheets In TDM mode the DSU performs several verification checks like verifying that the sum of the port speeds does not exceed the DDS or backup line speed line speeds are set in the DSU and DBM submenus primary and backup port speeds are set in the PrtSp submenu The DSU will not save configuration option selections if there is a mismatch in option settings Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide for a list of TDM or MCMP error messages what they mean and how they can be corrected When choosing TDM MCMP or Bridge mode you are presented with the configuration options listed in Table 5 9 In this table the configuration options with an X for a particular mode are valid for the mode selected A configuration option without an X either does not appear in that mode is forced to a certain value or has no meaning for that mode For an option forced to a certain value all o
56. CONTROL DDS 56 KBPS BRANCH MCMP BRANCH MCMP Figure 4 17 shows how the three independent applications can be combined via the MCMP capability to operate over one DDS 56 kbps multipoint circuit A simple channel to port assignment allows a teller workstation an ATM or an additional security system to be added at any one of the branch locations e g assigning Channel A to any of the unused ports at Branch Site 1 allows an additional teller workstation to be added at that location as shown in Figure 4 17 A 19 2 KBPS 4 8 5 2 4 5 SITE 1 6 TELLER A 19 2 KBPS 4 8 5 2 4 KBPS SITE 2 6 19 2 KBPS 4 8 5 2 4 KBPS SITE 6 6 491 12997 Figure 4 17 Applications Combined on One DDS Multipoint Circuit with MCMP 4 22 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Line and Channel Speeds The MCMP capability operates only on a 56 kbps DDS multipoint circuit Speeds of any channel can be set to the synchronous speed of 1 2 2 4 4 8 7 2 9 6 12 14 4 16 8 19 2 38 4 or 48 kbps full duplex A channel can be used either synchronously or asynchronously Possible asynchronous rates include all rates available to synchronous operation 1 2 through 48 kbps Asynchronous rates of 150 300 and 1200 bps require the allocation of 1200 bps The asynchronous speed of 600 and 1800 bps re
57. CTS Del 0 AntiStream Disab PrtSp DSU 4 8 Prt2 9 6 Prt3 19 2 Prt4 through Prt6 Disab psu DBM PORT 5 PRT SP 1 4800 4800 2 9600 9600 3 19200 19200 4800 BPS DDS 56000 BPS 56000 BPS SWITCHED 56 KBPS NETWORK 494 13938 02 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios PrtSp DBM Prt1 4 8 Prt2 9 6 Prt3 19 2 Prt4 through Prt6 Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab AggrSwitch Disab V 54 Lpbk Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type 3600e Diag DBM Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 RemoteDiag Enhan e Diag Gen Position Cntrl for control Trib for tributary LinkConfig Pt Pt Diag Conn CC for control N A for tributary DBM AutoAnswer Enab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Disab Dial Test Enab Primary Core No DTRCallCon Disab Gen DTE Port EIA232 SW Vers Normal Bkup Auto Bckup Enab Backup Dir enter Dir number 1 to 10 BckupOnCMI Enab AutoRestor Enab NtwkTimOut enter amount of time RestorTimOut enter amount of time TriesTimOut enter amount of time MultiCall Disab LPDA LPDA 2 Enab LPDA Address 1 SNA Backup Disab 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Digital Bridge Configuration Scenar
58. DBM PORT PRT Sp PRT SP 1 9 6 9 6 2 3 4 492 13002 01 Figure 4 22 Case 2 Backing Up the Channels to the Most Important Tributary Location 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 29 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 3 Backing up one complete channel bandwidth At the central site an extended bridge both partial and full backup Figures 4 23 and and a DBM V for each tributary must be available 4 24 In this case each tributary DSU in need of Refer to the Multipoint Dial Backup section of this service restoration must be equipped with a DBM chapter Essentially the backup becomes dial and the MCMP Backup configuration option must backup of a single multipoint circuit be set to TDM with only one port assigned CARRIER port DSU DBM PRT SP PRT SP DDS 56 KBPS DSU DBM PORT PRT SP PRT SP 1 9 6 9 6 ENABLED VIA FEP PORT SHARING CROSSOVER CABLES 492 13003 01 TDM AND DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLES ARE USED WITH NON MODULAR UNITS EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg Figure 4 23 Case 3 Backing Up One Complete Channel Partial Backup 4 30 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation When backup is provided for one channel the MCMP circuit can support a total of five application channels and the control DSU must have the backup port and the next highest port configured as an FEP port sharing group The channel to be backed up must a
59. DCP followed by a colon and the value that should be set selected 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units NOTE In this appendix full backup indicates that in order to operate all remote devices must switch data to backup lines when one or more tributaries require backup Partial backup indicates that only affected remote devices will switch data to backup lines when the DDS line is lost to the tributary site all other devices continue to operate over the DDS line TDM Configuration Scenarios There are two TDM scenarios described in this section In the first scenario the network transports two channels of synchronous data between the host computer at the central site and the terminals and printer at the remote site The second scenario shows full backup of TDM circuits using Switched 56 DBMs INTERACTIVE CHANNEL B 2400 BPS PRINTER 3611 DSU CHANNEL WITH TDM CONTROL CHANNEL B RUNS UNDERSPEED ACTUAL RATE 2000 BPS TDM Scenario 1 Using Two Synchronous Channels In this configuration shown in Figure D 1 there are two synchronous channels Channel A is the interactive channel between the host computer and the terminal users Channel B is the printer channel carrying print jobs to the remote printers The DSUs are configured for nondisruptive diagnostics and the secondary channel is running at 400 bps When a terminal user submits a file f
60. DSU MCMP s option sets configuration options and configuration option values An explanation for each configuration option within each option set based upon the DSU s mode of operation is provided in the Configuration Option Tables section in Chapter 6 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide If more detailed configuration information is needed when configuring the unit refer to Configuration Options Chapter 6 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide Instructions Configuration Worksheets can be used for reference to record changes made to the DSU s configuration options or to record the configurations saved to the Usrl Usr2 or Usr3 areas of the DSU Make a copy of the appropriate Configuration Worksheets provided in this appendix Complete the information at the top of each worksheet first If you have a Model 3610 standalone DSU with TDM or MCMP enter your site in the location field If you have a Model 3611 carrier mounted DSU with TDM or MCMP enter the DSU s carrier and slot location If recording Model 3611 DSU configurations make a copy for each DSU TDM or DSU MCMP Record the configuration or changes by circling the appropriate configuration setting either all of the configuration options or all those that change from their factory loaded default values Circle the appropriate hardware strap settings as well 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 199
61. DSU and the DBM Figure 5 4 During the test the TXD RXD and RTS indicators show internal activity which may be different from the states of the same leads at the DTE interface NOTE On power up the DSU sends out polls to determine whether the DBM and MUX circuit cards are installed MUX indicates a TDM or MCMP The DSU then initiates a Device Test on itself and each of the available circuit cards The results of the Device Tests appear momentarily on the DCP s LCD The DBM must be in Idle mode or Disconnect mode with no call in progress The Device Test is a 15 to 20 second test that does not require any connection except ac power to the DSU For a DSU TDM or 050 the Device Test checks both the DSU and the TDM or MCMP circuit cards To access the Device Test from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Test DSU or DBM select active core Devic Results For the DSU with or the following appears Device DSU MUX A Pass Pass CA gt For the DBM the following appears Device DBM A Pass Le gt While the test 15 progress second line displays Abrt so that the test can be aborted If a network loopback is in effect when a power up Device Test is initiated the test will not run and the second line on t
62. Data Service Unit Menu ABBREVIATIONS Configure DTE Loopback Loopback Switch to DDS Path Control End to End Test Messages Switch to DDD Path i Device Test External Leads Configuration Options Acquire i Diagnostic Factory Bridge Poll List Aggregate Switch Directory Factory Control Port Speed Backup i Disconnect Factory Tributary Remote Mode Bit Error Rate Test Digital Loopback Device Health Status Remote Loopback Change Mode Drop Backup Identity Status Circuit Quality Display Monitor Port Terminal Power Clear Digital Test Local Loopback Transmitter Control Opts PList m 2 Dir 7 Phone Addr ChgMd Term Disp Cir Chang Add Mi Acq Load Save Enab Disab Pswrd CID Execute Pswrd Load Save Activ Delet Skip Chang Cir Save DPI ADp DMC Load Save Execute Load 4 Undo TxCtl LEDs ExiL DSU DBM Devi Chang Activ 219 Port Select 3 Address Disab Usri Us Load Save 8 7 7 9 SAVE DSU Diag DBM Gen Bkup LPDA 7 e 7 DSU DBM Gen DUX Chan Activ Remt Usri Usr2 043 Setup Pri 4 5 Pre Address 8 Activ Us Us Us Copy Copy TDM CBrdgA EBrdgA None From Pri Pri4 Pr5 Pre Al Pri PrtS Pre 2921499102 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 A 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units A 4 March 1999 3
63. Data Service Units Non Modular DSU with a TDM or MCMP The non modular Model 3611 DSU TDM or DSU MCMP has connectors mounted directly onto the circuit cards With this type of unit the DTE cables must be disconnected before the unit can be removed from the carrier A 60 pin high density connector is mounted onto the TDM or MCMP circuit card This connector requires either a TDM Interface Cable feature number 3600 F2 500 part number 035 0101 0631 or a Digital Bridge Interface Cable feature number 3600 F2 501 part number 035 0102 0631 depending upon the application These cables must be ordered separately These cables provide fan out cabling to five individual EIA 232 25 pin connectors Each cable is six feet long and connected to the unit s dedicated DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds The fan out section is one foot long Appendix C shows each cable and its pin assignments as well as the or MCMP s 60 pin high density connector To order cables refer to Equipment Lists Appendix L of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator Guide Modular DSU with a TDM or MCMP The modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP has gold finger contacts for connectors which plug into a 6 port connector module delivered with the unit that is mounted onto the rear of the carrier With this type of unit the DTE cables do not have to be disconnected before removing the unit from the carrier Each port on th
64. GB41 60 Principles of Operation When digital sharing is used a multipoint circuit make sure there is no overlap of LPDA 2 tributary addresses NetView Initiated Dial Backup The 3600 Series DSUs support Net View initiated dial backup in a point to point configuration only Figure 4 42 A DBM must be installed The dial backup may be automated by the 3600 Series DSUs or initiated from NetView NMS or the DCP The 3600 Series DSUs continue to respond to and process the LPDA 2 commands as a DSU By enabling the SNA Backup configuration option discussed in the LPDA 2 Configuration Options section of Chapter 5 the DSU is allowed to respond to the LPDA Call Out and NMS CARRIER NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS ADp ADDRESS LPDA 2 CONTROL CC CONTROL CHANNEL 2 1 CURRENT LINE QUALITY 1 WORST LINE QUALITY N AV Disconnect LPDA 2 commands The Call Out command instructs the DSU to set up dial backup from the control site and switch to the PSTN line The Disconnect command terminates disconnects the PSTN call at the control DSU and returns data to the DDS line For extended circuit configurations the extended circuit link can also be configured to respond to NetView dial backup commands by turning on SNA Backup at the extended control DSU When in dial backup the 3600 Series DSUs operating with the SNA Interface option continue to support the DSU CSU and Line Status and T
65. Lowest Port 1 2 3 4 5 TxCarrSel Const Cntrl RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark Ports in Gp 2 3 4 5 6 RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark PCC Buffer Enab Disab Host DSD PCC Buffer Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab 1 2 FEPSh Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments P3 4 FEPSh Enab Disab RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments DTR Alarm Enab Disab P5 6 FEPSh Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Bckup MCMP TDM Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR Tst Enab Disab Available for MCMP Flex with DSU firmware version 6 3x or greater 1 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Extend Chan Yes No DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Prt3 Options Value DTE EIA232 V 35 Opius Nave gt Enab Disab Pri4 Options Value Async Sync Enab Disab Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 AsyncSync Enab Disab x Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 anne Stop Bits 1 2 AsyncBit Char 678910 Stop Bits 1 2 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Stop Bits 1 2 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 RTS FrcOn DTE Overspeed 125 25 RTS FrcOn DTE TxCarrSel Const RTS FrcOn DTE TxCarrSel Const Cntrl
66. RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments Ports in Gp 2 3 4 5 6 DTR Alarm Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab Port Host DSD Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Share DevB p DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab MCMP option only Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Prt6 Options Value Prt4 Options Value Prt5 Options Value RTS FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE TxCarrSel Const Cntrl TxCarrSel Const Gonet EINE RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark RxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab PCC Buffer Enab Disab ElastSior Enab Disab Elat Star Ends Disa Blast Stor F ap aisan i RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments DTR Alarm Enab Disab DIR Alarm Enab Disab E Alarm Disab Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab s 00 sec async terminal 2 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab 00 async terminal 0 100 DSR FrcOn Enab Disab ENCON Enas Diap DSR
67. RXD RTS Green Internal lead states at DSU DBM V DBM S DBM D DTE interface CTS DSR DTR circuit designations LSD 5 Control circuit active or Data circuit SPACE ing For the DSU with TDM or MCMP the circuit external lead states for any of the TDM or MCMP ports can be selected from the DCP via the Control branch For a 3611 DSU with TDM or MCMP the port LED illuminated on the TDM or MCMP faceplate indicates the monitored port For Model 3610 DSUS the monitored port is displayed on the DCP s LED display Front Panel Yellow Device is currently selected by the SDCP the SDCP addresses one Model 3611 only device at a time For a Model 3611 DSU with TDM or MCMP the TDM or MCMP circuit card is also selected the TDM or MCMP circuit card has same address as its associated DSU Health and status for the TDM or MCMP is integrated into the Health and Status report for the device For an alarm in the DSU with TDM or MCMP this report indicates whether the TDM MCMP or DSU is at alarm Any test involving the TDM or MCMP also involves the DSU and the test is integrated into the DSU s Health and Status report 3The device is automatically put into Test mode when a remote DSU or DBM is performing a disruptive test 9 a Local Loopback at the control DSU select LL A device in Test mode has its DTE interface turned Off With DSU unless it has an MCMP or DBM V DBM S DBM D running with disruptive diagnostics thi
68. Remote Digital Loopback the local DSU control or tributary or the 6700 or 6800 Series NMS places the remote DSU into Digital Loopback A control DSU can originate Remote Digital Loopback in a point to point or multipoint network a tributary DSU can only originate Remote Digital Loopback in a point to point network When a control or tributary DSU originates Remote Digital Loopback both originating and targeted DSUs enter Test mode On a multipoint circuit all tributaries are placed in Test mode No other test can be run at the originating DSU or the targeted DSU until the Remote Digital Loopback is aborted NOTE To abort the Remote Digital Loopback issue the Abort command to the control DSU DBM not the tributary For a DSU Remote Digital Loopback is session disruptive except when a dial backup session is active and used to determine whether a control DSU a single tributary and the network between them are functioning properly This requires a network connection to both DSUs However a DTE connection to the remote DSU is not required For a DBM Remote Digital Loopback is session disruptive when the DBM is in Dial Backup mode and nondisruptive when in Standby mode DTE connection to the remote DBM is not required BASIC MODE OR AGGR REMOTE DL LOOPBACK DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 1 PORT 1 DTE DTE INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 5 PORT 6 P
69. Series Data Service Units If in MCMP mode the following is displayed Chang Prt Speed ES EE Chan m EJ L8 gt Select the option set to be edited or changed Selecting DSU allows you to change the primary port speed configurations selecting Chan allows you to change the channel to port assignment configurations Poll List The Poll List PList submenu maintains or changes a DSU s poll list A poll list identifies all DSUs or DBMs one level downstream in the network control DSU includes its tributary DSUs or DSUs and DBMs in its poll list A backbone tributary DSU includes any extended control DSUs DBMs APL modems that are attached to the diagnostic channel DC A poll list is available to any control DSU that is configured for nondisruptive or mixed diagnostics Diag Type NonD or Mixed or a control DSU configured for MCMP mode and disruptive diagnostics MUX Funct MCMP and Diag Type Disr PList is also available for point to point tributary DSUs or tributaries configured for MCMP mode and nondisruptive diagnostics in order to support extended diagnostic circuits PList is only available in the Local branch and only to a DSU configured with nondisruptive and mixed diagnostics To access PList from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 e Confg e PList The following appears Poll List Displ Cir Chang 2
70. Status messages are updated periodically If no downstream DSU s are being monitored No PList is displayed instead of the address and status for an active poll list member For a list of status messages and their meanings see Appendix C of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide DTE Status The DTE Status displays a snapshot of the local or remote DSU DBM s external DTE interface status Ten different signal statuses are reported To access the DTE status report from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e DTE NOTE If there is only one port the DTE Status screen is displayed f there is more than one port the Port screen is displayed prior to the DTE Status screen f using FEP port sharing select the first port in the digital sharing group to obtain DTE Status For or Bridge mode the following additional menu appears Port Number 4 Nbre J B gt Use the F1 and F2 keys to display the port number of your choice then press the F3 key to have your choice accepted Results The DTE interface statuses are displayed in sets Use the or gt key to scroll the next set of lead statuses into view Table 5 3 translates the status codes The following is displayed for the selected DSU TDM s or DSU MCMP s external DTE interface The
71. Test DT or EE test There a number of tests that can be initiated depending upon your configuration To determine the appropriate test s to run for a DBM or DBM V DBM S or DBM D see Table 5 3 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide To determine the appropriate test s to run for a DSU and for additional information refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide 5 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Abort The Abort selection allows you to terminate a test that is running When a test is running the DBM is in Test mode and is not allowed to run any other test To access the Abort selection from the top level menu make the following selections Local or Remot F2 and Address e Test DSU or DBM select active core e Abort There are two types of selections to abort a test e Subn Subnetwork terminates any test running at the control DSU or at a tributary DSU or DBM associated with the control e Selective terminates whatever test is in progress at the local DBM Results After selecting either Subn or Selective the test is terminated and the DCP displays the message Command Complete Device Test The Device Devic Test uses a test pattern generator built into the DSU to perform a local loopback on both the
72. The DSU with TDM or MCMP only permits one test to be active at a time Thus if Port 1 is placed in loopback To access the DTE Loopback from the top level menu another port cannot be placed in loopback The only test make the following selections Local F1 Test selection available is Abort DSU or DBM select active core Lpbk DTE Port selection TRANSMITTER NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 3 INTERFACE PORTA PORT 5 PORT 6 PORT 2 LOOPBACK DTE LOOPBACK 49212874401 Figure 5 6 DTE Loopback Port 2 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 19 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Digital Loopback Digital Loopback DL is used for manual testing of the remote end of the circuit For example a remote Digital Loopback may be required in order to complete an external Bit Error Rate Test BERT from the remote DSU The local DSU receives test data loops it back to the transmitter before the DTE interface and returns it to the network Figure 5 7 For the DSU the Digital Loopback command is session disruptive except when a dial backup session is active It is used to condition the DSU for testing to determine whether the DSU connection to the network is functioning properly This test requires a DDS network circuit between two DSUs DTE connections to the DSUs are not required For the DBM Digital Loopback is used to determine whether the DBM connection to the dial network is functioning prope
73. This chapter contains only installation information that 15 specific to or including the Flex and DSD options NOTE Unless specifically noted TDM refers to a TDM TDM Flex or TDM DSD and MCMP refers to an MCMP MCMP Flex or MCMP DSD TDM or MCMP installation consists of the following procedures which should be performed in the order listed e Physical installation of the TDM or MCMP e Change the S1 hardware strap if necessary e Changing the switch position for the TDM Flex or MCMP Flex for a DSU having a firmware version less than 6 3x or orientation of the TDM DSD or MCMP DSD option card if necessary Electrical connection e Network diagnostic connection Software configuration e DDS network or LADS connection e PSTN or switched 56 kbps network connection if the DBM is installed e DSU DTE connection Operation verification Although the Model 3610 DSU is designed for desk or table top operation an ACCULINK 3100 Series CSU wall mount adapter may be ordered to mount the DSU with TDM or MCMP on a wall an equipment shelf a 19 inch RS 310 C or 23 inch AT amp T DATAPHONE equipment cabinet To order the adapter refer to Equipment Lists Appendix L of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide For DSU installation information order the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s G
74. Time Division Multiplexer Connector Used with Non Modular TDM C 2 C 2 Digital Bridge Connector Used with Non Modular TDM MCMP C 5 C 3 60 Position High Density Connector TDM MCMP Ports 2 through 6 for Model 3811 DSW 5 hein DERE RE QURE holes C 9 BIA 232 D V 24 Connector Port I C 10 W3sGonaestortPolt 1 ERA quer bbs C 11 C 6 Model 3610 Ports 2 6 and Modular DSU 25 Pin V 35 Connector C 13 C 7 232 24 TDM MCMP Connector Modular and standalone Ports 2 through B espe C 15 C 8 6 Port V 35 Interconnect Cable Connector i e ore ehe C 17 vi March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Preface About this Guide This applications guide is intended as a supplement to the operator s guide it only contains installation and operation information that is specific to the Time Division Multiplexer TDM Multichannel Multipoint MCMP and digital bridge options for the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DSUs Models 3610 and 3611 Since a DBM V DBM S or DBM D is only used in digital bridge configurations information specific to these circuit cards 15 included in this applications guide along with SNA Diagnostic Interface information as it applies to TDM or MCMP configurations However a DBM V DBM S or DBM D operates like an internal Dial Backup Mo
75. Various configurations for digital bridge and DBM V DBM S and DBM D applications are shown in Appendix D Installation procedures for connecting DBMs are included in the Adding the TDM or MCMP Option to an Installed Model 3611 DSU section in this chapter 3 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation Hardware Straps HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES This product is designed to protect sensitive components from damage due to electrostatic discharge ESD during normal operation When performing installation procedures however take proper static control precautions to prevent damage to equipment If you are not sure of the proper static control precautions contact your nearest sales or service representative FACEPLATE 24 3611 DSU has switch jumper the circuit card that should be reset if necessary before the DSU is inserted into the carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide which can be ordered to change the straps When the Test Mode Indication jumper is enabled the V 35 lead NN and Pin 25 on the EIA 232 D V 24 interface go to ON EIA level condition during a Test mode This 15 the default setting on a DBM V DBM S or DBM D When disabled the leads do not change to indicate a Test mode The indicator lead for each interface can be enabled or disabled independ
76. a dial backup session Is active When in MCMP mode the port selected is not necessarily the port placed in loopback at the remote location For example if a channel assigned to Port 2 locally is assigned to Port 3 remotely then selecting Port 2 places Port 3 at the remote location in loopback When a DSU control or tributary originates Remote Digital Loopback both the originating DSU and the targeted DSU enter Test mode On a multipoint circuit all other tributaries are also placed in Test mode No other test can be run at the originating DSU or the targeted DSU until the Remote Digital Loopback is aborted Results The DBM does not generate the test results 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 23 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Bilateral Loopback NOTE Bilateral Loopback shown in Figure 5 9 is a combination of DTE and Digital Loopbacks operating simultaneously the same DSU Bilateral Loopback or Loopback configuration option is enabled requesting a Remote Digital Loopback is a customer selectable configuration Digital Loopback or Digital Test choice see the General Configuration Option Table in on a port also initiates a DTE Chapter 6 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Loopback on the port Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator Guide Requesting an aggregate Remote Digital Loopback or Digital Loopback automatically initiates a DTE Loopback on all ports TRANSMIT
77. activity during the last second 1 Only the MCMP circuit card can be configured for MCMP mode of operation 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table 5 2 DSU with TDM or MCMP and DBM V DBM S DBM D Status Indicators Label Color Description OK Green Health and status indicator The device s operation is normal The device has not detected any of the alarms listed in the Alrm section below This indicator flashes two times per second if a message is present Alrm Red Health and status indicator for an alarm in the local or remote device For the DSU with or the alarm may be in the communications path between the DSU and TDM or MCMP circuit card The following alarms at the local or remote device cause the Alrm status indicator on the affected device to light Configuration Corrupt Device Alarm Dial Tone Test Failure DTE Alarm Facility Alarm MUX Failure No Response Redundant Power Alarm Streaming Terminal Subnetwork Alarm and Out of Frame Threshold Test Yellow Active device DSU or DBM V DBM S DBM D is either performing a test or other units are in Test mode For a DSU with TDM or MCMP test activity may be in the TDM or MCMP circuit card 2 3 4 Dial Yellow DBM V DBM S DBM D is active Rapid flashing Call setup in progress Slow flashing Call established but in Standby mode Steady ON Backup call established and active TXD
78. activity shown may be different from the states displayed by the DSU s LED indicators which sometimes reflect the internal states of the interface circuits In this example Port 1 was designated Prt01 DTE Stats A _RXD DSR A If only one port is active the DTE Status screen is displayed If more than one port is active the Port screen is displayed prior to the DTE Status screen Table 5 3 DTE Lead Status Codes Code Lead Status E ON SPACE above text line Off MARK below text line At least one transition between Off MARK and ON SPACE has been detected during the monitoring window 5 10 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Circuit Quality Circuit Quality CircQ only appears when a 32 DBM is installed report shows the level and quality of the signal being received from the network by the V 32 DBM To access the Circuit Quality status report from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e CircQ Results The following is displayed for the local or remote device selected Circuit Quality S N Ratio A ri re rs When there is no dialed call all values are reported as an x A Table 5 4 lists the circuit quality measurements and the range of possible values Press the E gt
79. appropriate DBMs and their dial connections perform the following series of tests from the control DSU using the SDCP or an NMS to verify network operation gt Procedure 1 Request a device Identity ID from the Status branch report from each tributary to ensure that the DSU is addressed properly 2 Perform a Digital Test on the DDS circuit to ensure that the network is functioning Refer to the Digital Test section of chapter 5 For a DSU configured for TDM mode perform a Digital Test on each active port For a DSU configured for MCMP mode perform a Digital Test on each tributary DSU on the aggregate channel For a digital sharing group perform a Digital Test on the lower numbered port in the digital sharing group only NOTE A control DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point or multipoint network A tributary DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point network only provided the configuration option Respond to Remote Digital Loopback RespondRDL is enabled in the control For a DSU equipped with a DBM p Procedure 1 Select the Dial command to establish a dialed call to the tributary to test for dial tone and verify that the DSU can initiate and receive calls 2 Select the Dial command to switch the data to the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit enter Dial Backup mode to ensure that both DSUs have been configured correctly 3 Perform a Digital Test on both
80. are available selections for Prt1 are set via the DSU and Gen submenus option sets Change MUX Opts A Setup A A Prt3 Prt4 5 In port path you presented with the configuration options listed in Table 5 10 In this table the configuration options with an X for a particular mode are valid for the mode selected A configuration option without an X either does not appear in that mode is forced to a certain value or has no meaning for that mode For an option forced to a certain value all of the values normally available to that option still appear but changes made have no effect the configuration option s value is not overwritten in software The Copy selection allows the set of configuration options that have been specified for a port to be copied into another port or into all other ports There are two menus associated with Copy Copy from and Copy to To access the Copy from menu Change MUX Opts A Copy Setup 2 pib Prt4 5 from A Pri Prt2 m a a e 85 Prt2 Prt4 Pris Prt6 The Prt1 selection in the Copy from menu appears in TDM or MCMP mode shown above but not in Bridge mode Select a port for this example Port 3 is selected The Copy to menu appears Copy Prt3 to A all A 8 8 gt
81. cable connector 6 port terconnect C 17 digital bridge interface C 5 pin assignments TDM interface C 2 central site bridging 4 45 architecture partial backup 4 42 4 43 DBM V DBM S DBM D change hardware settings 2 4 interface compatibility channel backup 4 29 capacity 1 4 independent 4 26 management speeds 1 4 4 23 underspeed 4 6 circuit backbone TDM quality measurements 5 11 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier 3 10 configuration branch 5 7 5 31 options 3 4 mode of o peration 5 35 5 32 port setup 5 36 port speed setting scenarios TDM D 2 software DCP worksheets connector cable terconnect 6 port EIA 232 V 24 modular standalone EIA 232 D V 24 port high density ports 2 6 model 3611 9 module 6 port C 14 non modular carrier mounted circuit card digital bridge C 5 control branch 5 85 43 menu options DSU assigning address NMS transmitter DBM DBM V DBM S DBM D backup branch 4 451 46 2 wire 1 9 DBM S 4 45 46 4 wire 1 9 DBM V 1 9 H 45 H 46 DBM V DBM S DBM D 32 status indicators 5 5 6 aggregate switching 1 3 DCE interface digital bridge 4 33 DCP menu tree 5 7 software configuration 2 10 Index 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Index DDS connections 4 40
82. disconnect the dial connection switch data to the dial connection and switch to the DDS circuit refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide Bridge When the DSU is configured as an extended bridge EBrdg the Bckup menu is displayed however the DSU DBM or DSU DBM V is always in Dial Backup mode If an attempt to drop backup DrBU is made a Conflict w Envir message is displayed When a DSU is configured as a central site bridge a DBM circuit card can be installed but the DBM must be disabled When the TDM or MCMP circuit card is installed only two sections are displayed one turns the bridge ON Bkup and the other turns it Off DrBU Select Bkup to activate the bridge disconnect the DDS line from the bridge and switch to internal timing select DrBU to deactivate the bridge to connect the DDS line to the bridge and switch to DDS timing The digital bridge s mode determines the menu that is displayed when Bckup is selected 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 13 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units For a DSU configured as a central site bridge with configuration option Bridge Rate set to DDS one of the following two screens appears DBM Brdg with DDS a Bkup CJ DBM Brdg w o fe le gt For a DSU configured as central site b
83. has been formed If the digital sharing group at each of the tributary locations Notice that the consists of adjacent ports the digital sharing groups can be different at each tributary digital sharing group can be DSU created via an alternate method using the Sharing Device A Share DevA and Sharing MCMP with FEP Port Sharing Device B Share DevB configuration options Refer to the Both MCMP capability and TDM capability provide MUX Configuration Options the FEP port sharing feature Refer to the Time Division section of Chapter 5 Multiplexing section of this chapter CARRIER DDS 56000 BPS 19200 BPS A 19200 BPS B 9600 BPS C B 19200BPS 9600 BPS DIGITAL SHARING GROUPS 19200 BPS B 19200 BPS 9600 BPS 491 13000 Figure 4 20 MCMP with Digital Sharing 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 27 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units MCMP Backup Backup may be achieved in one of five ways e Case 1 Dedicated MCMP Backup with Switched 56 DBMs Figure 4 21 In this case two DBM Ss are dedicated to the control DSU Two tributary DSUs are equipped with a Switched 56 DBM and MCMP A DSU with a TDM circuit card configured for extended bridge EBrdg mode is used to bridge the aggregate data stream to the DBMs AGGREGATE DATA PATH EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg If the control DSU MCMP is enabled for Aggregate Switching aggregate data data framing and diagnostics
84. in this example is taken from the aggregate port This step is not necessary for partial backup that is when not all tributaries were lost 56000 BPS 494 13940 01 Figure D 13 Dedicated Backup Configuration with Switched 56 DBMs 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 27 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Next send a dial command followed by a Dial Mode dm command to each of the DBM Ss performing backup A routine command can be created to issue the command sequence automatically Each DBM S responds by dialing a tributary Switched 56 DBM When connected the pair of DBMs handshake and exchange passwords and enter Data mode ready to send data After the tributary DSU DBM has set up the call each DSU switches data to its DBM After all calls are completed full restoration is accomplished at 56 kbps The DBM Ss provide valid call setup messages to the NMS If the NMS does not receive a valid call setup message from a DBM S the NMS operator issues another dial command followed by a dm command to the DBM This completes the backup circuit and the host computer can restart the network polling When backup is completed the FEP line may be restarted if necessary During backup the DSU still reports the facility alarm to the NMS When the failure is corrected and the DDS network is restored the alarm is turned Off at the workstation s Alarm Monitor window You can request an aggr
85. in error Max if the maximum error count has been reached which is 64000 The Clr selection resets the counter to 0 Tot Error Err Secs Running count of errored seconds Errored second is when at least one error is detected during a 1 second time period The Clr selection resets the counter to O Run on portnn Port selected for testing 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 29 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units BERT WITH LOOPBACK RECEIVER TRANSMITTER DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTERFACE emi dee DTE DTE TDM MCMP TDM MCMP INTERFACE PORT2 PORT2 3 3 PORT 4 PORTA 5 fo PORTS LOOPBACK PORTS PORTS TOT ERROR ERR SECS TX and RX COMBINED LOCAL DSU REMOTE DSU B DUAL BERT DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 1 PORT 1 DTE DTE INTERFACE TDM MCMP TDM MCMP INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 2 3 PORT 3 PORTA PORT 4 PORTS PORTS Bone 22222108 PORT6 TOT ERROR TOT ERROR ERR SECS RX ONLY ERR SECS RX ONLY LOCAL DSU REMOTE DSU 492 12878 01 Figure 5 12 Bit Error Rate Tests Mode 5 30 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Lamp Test The Lamp test is a test of the status indicators LEDs on the DSU s DCP both models and the LCDs on the Model 3610 DCP and the SDCP When the Lamp test is performed on the Model 36
86. indicators TXD RXD etc The LEDs on the TDM or MCMP circuit card show which ports are being monitored when the TDM or MCMP mode is in operation You can also choose to monitor the aggregate data stream To access LEDs from the top level menu make the following selections Local Fl e Ctrl e LEDs LEDs Port A Load Save gt Press the F1 key to select Load The following submenu appears Port CA Undo A le Use the F1 T or F2 1 keys to display the port number of your choice If you choose not to continue press the F3 key Undo to restore the prior port value then press the X key to return to the top level menu 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 45 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units When in TDM or MCMP mode the selections are 1 2 3 4 5 6 or Aggr Aggr is the communications interface between the aggregate data path on the TDM or MCMP circuit card and the DSU In Bridge mode the selections are 1 2 3 4 5 6 or DCE DCE is the communications interface between Port 1 on the TDM or MCMP circuit card and the DSU Port 1 is the aggregate link to the DTE while Ports 2 through 6 may be connected to DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds Refer to the TDM Architecture and Digital Bridge sections of Chapter 4 for additional information LEDs Port 2 m 5 undo 75 1 8
87. is routed from the spare Port 1 interface on the control DSU MCMP to the extended bridge The extended bridge should be configured for Bridge Timing set to Auto The control and tributary DSUs should have Disruptive Type set to Br56 The tributary DSUs should be configured for MCMP Backup set to MCMP 56000 BPS 494 13940 01 Figure 4 21 Case 1 Dedicated MCMP Backup with Switched 56 DBMs 4 28 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation e Case 2 Backing up as many channels as possible to the one most important tributary location Figure 4 22 In this case the control DSU and the one tributary DSU selected for dial backup must be equipped with a DBM configured with MCMP Backup set to TDM Essentially the backup becomes dial backup of a point to point TDM circuit Because the backup is performed in TDM mode both TDM and MCMP configuration options must be set Therefore Port 1 at the control DSU should be mapped to Port 1 at the tributary DSU For Case 1 only two DSD groups can be supported MCMP mode normally supports three DSD groups and the inbound pseudo carrier control configuration options RxCarrSel and TxCarrSel need to be set for backup 1 other tributary locations are not served until the alarm is fixed and the MCMP circuit is restored PSTN 14 4 KBPS DSU DBM PORT PRT SP PRT SP CONTROL SECONDARY CHANNEL 400 BPS DDS 56 KBPS DSU
88. on the Model 3611 8 DSU and rotate the lock to the open position Figure 3 3 3 Pull out and down on the latch at the bottom of the DSU s faceplate until the circuit card starts to come out of its slot in the carrier Pull the circuit card free of the carrier and set the DSU on a clean ESD anti static workpad 4 Insert the two plastic snaplock posts into their respective holes in the DSU circuit card see Figure 3 3 5 Insert the plastic slotted screw located near the top 9 and rear of the DSU circuit card through its associated hole on the DSU and thread a standoff post onto the screw Using a flat blade 10 screwdriver tighten the plastic slotted screw until the standoff fits snugly against the circuit card do not overtighten CAUTION A plastic screw must be used on the far side of the DSU to avoid contact with the printed circuit wire path Use care in handling the circuit card and Screws to avoid cutting traces Attach the two remaining standoff posts to the DSU with the two Phillips head screws and flat washers Tighten the screws until the standoff posts fit snugly against the circuit card do not overtighten Install the black banded end of the double ended pin header into its mating connector on the DSU Make sure that the double ended pin header is fully seated If the double ended pin header and its mating connector do not fit you have an older model DSU Contact your service representa
89. part number 654 0099 0131 If connecting a port to data communications equipment DCE a crossover cable is required feature number 3211 178F for a V 35 Crossover Cable or feature number 4951 035F for an EIA 232 Crossover Cable f using V 35 operation a V 35 adapter feature number 3000 F 1 510 is required for Ports 2 through 6 the V 35 connector on the DSU is used for Port 1 Before disconnecting the DSU p Procedure 1 Copy the applicable Configuration Worksheet from Appendix B 2 Access Stat Status branch and ID Identity subbranch 3 Record the unit s serial number at the top of Page 1 of the Configuration Worksheet 4 Access Confg Configuration branch 5 Record the configuration option settings for each option set DSU Diag etc If a DBM is installed continue with Record all Backup Directory entries 2 Record the unit s local telephone number Phone For instructions and handling precautions for opening the DSU refer to the Hardware Straps and Changing the Hardware Settings sections of this chapter 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 13 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Getti ng Started 5 If a TDM or MCMP is being replaced disconnect the additional port interface cable s as well As you follow these steps refer to Figure 2 8 gt Procedure NOTE 1 Unplug the table top ac transformer from the ac If a TDM or MCMP is being outlet then disconnect the power cor
90. priorities CARRIER DDS 56000 BPS 4800 BPS 9600 BPS PSTN 14400 BPS CARRIER DDS 56000 BPS 492 12995 02 SUM OF THE DBM PORT SPEEDS MUST BE NO GREATER THAN THE DIAL BACKUP SPEED e g 14400 BPS Figure 4 12 Case 2 V 32 Backup for High Speed DSU 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 17 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units e Case 3 V 32 Backup for high speed DSU with speed selection feature of the TDM circuit card will extended circuits Figure 4 13 When the provide this function to modems such as the backbone circuit is restored at 14 4 kbps the port COMSPHERE 3400 Series modems that are speeds at the tributary DSU may need to be capable of falling back in speed in response to an reduced If the port speed of the extended circuit Off signal on their speed select input lead This must be reduced then the speed of the extended requires a special crossover cable feature modems must be reduced accordingly The number 3400 F1 501 psu DBM PORT enr sp PRT SP PSTN 14400 BPS DSU DBM Port PRT SP PRT SP CARRIER MODEM MODEM DSU DBM PORT serae PRTsP 494 12852 03 NONDESCRIPTIVE DIAGNOSTICS Diag Type NonD Figure 4 13 Case 3 V 32 Backup for DSU with Extended Circuits 4 18 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation e Case 4 Switched 56 Backup for DSU operating port and TDM circuits operating at 56 kbps If the at 56 kbps or less Figur
91. s Guide Equipment Warranty and Support For the Equipment Warranty and Support instructions refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide NOTE If the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP was ordered as an integrated unit and needs repair contact your service representative do not remove the TDM or MCMP from the DSU 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 1 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 1 10 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation OVEIVIEW c 2 1 apo d tier eut abo isum qx ess Ieri ciu 2 2 Changing Hardware 560059 u uu s rne rhe meterle len rede pt ca fece 2 4 Changing the Flex Interface Switeh e Re er FREE VERAS 2 6 Changing the DSD Option Card eee be eee pee eas 2 7 Electrical Connection scotand ai hen ebore mie 2 8 Power Dp ROUNE s concent apasaq POPE ret d gap dies 2 8 Network Diagnostic rs eerte m ot rl e pct staal rea 2 10 Somare COME SUA OM son qoa Rent Madi 2 10 From the DCPand Asyne Terminal 5 2 10 Fromith NMS 9 Ere he kk eat nt PEN ee ku C ye ore qayaqa 2
92. submenu test result or range of configuration option selections appears on a single screen For additional information and examples refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide 5 42 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Control Branch The Control Ctrl branch allows you to enable or disable the DSU s transmitter as well as the DBM s and to display change the status of the general purpose external DTE leads For a DSU operating in TDM or MCMP mode the Control branch allows the transmitter to be enabled or disabled on a per port basis It also allows you to choose which of the six ports is to have its circuit leads monitored TOP LEVEL MENU TxCtl LEDs DSU DBM Ports Devic Port Select ExtL Disp Chang Enab Disab Load Save 492 12974 01 When in TDM or MCMP mode the following selections appear Control Funct A E LEDs i x fa fe le e When in Bridge mode the following selections appear Control Funct A LEDs ExtL e When Basic mode following selections appear Control Funct A ExtL Le LeJ Le gt A DBM can be disabled if it is addressed from the Remote branch The Control branch menu has three selections Table 5 13 lists the selections on the Control branch menu Table 5 13
93. terminal or from an NMS that supports this feature From the DCP and Async Terminal To change configuration options from the DCP use the selection sequence from the top level menu The Options Opts branch is used to change configuration options You can also change configuration options using an async terminal Once an async terminal session is active changing configuration options follows the same steps as as the DCP 2 10 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation To change configuration options of the Model 3610 DSU from the DCP or the Model 3610 from an async terminal select the Local branch then the Configuration Confg branch If not displayed press the gt key until Confg is displayed then press the function key below the selection Select Opts for Configuration Options then Load For additional information about changing configuration options from the DCP or async terminal or for a listing of messages received during installation refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options User s Guide Chapter 3 or order the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide and refer to Chapter 6 and Appendix E From the NMS Software configuration options for a Model 3610 with a TDM or MCMP can also be set from a 6800 Series NMS using the Change commands T
94. the DTE to run a test on the DTE connection to the DSU and verify that the DSU is functioning properly Figure 5 5 This test cannot be performed by the DBM Local loopback is used with the DTE test after the DSU passes the Device Test If you issue a Local Loopback to a tributary DSU the DSU must have a DBM installed or you will get a Conflict w Environ message Use the DBM to abort the Local Loopback by calling the tributary DSU CAUTION If a tributary DSU is in Local Loopback the DBM must be in Standby or Idle mode if the NMS is to abort the loopback If the DBM is in Dial Backup mode when the NMS issues the Abort command the command will not be recognized and the loopback must be aborted from the DCP LOOPBACK TDM MCMP OR BASIC MODE TRANSMITTER NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 3 PORTA PORT 5 PORT 6 LOCAL DSU 490 12873 Figure 5 5 Local Loopback 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 17 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units While the DSU is in Local Loopback any data transmission by the DTE is returned as received data Operator can send a test pattern and verify correct reception of the test The DSU does not monitor this testing When Local Loopback is requested of an inactive core there is no effect since data from DTE ports is routed through the active core For or Bridge mode the entire data stream is looped back therefore all six port
95. the unit p Procedure 1 Copy the applicable Configuration Worksheet from Appendix B 2 Access Stat Status branch and ID Identity subbranch 3 Record the unit s serial number at the top of Page 1 of the Configuration Worksheet 4 Access Confg Configuration branch 5 Record the configuration option settings for each option set DSU Diag etc If a DBM is installed continue with Record all Backup Directory entries 2 Record the unit s local telephone number Phone For instructions and handling precautions for opening the DSU refer to the Hardware Straps and Changing the Hardware Settings sections of this chapter 3 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation Installing Non Modular or 6 This section describes the procedure for adding a non modular TDM or MCMP circuit card onto a Model 3611 DSU and then into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier 7 One of two special cables that attach to the multiport connector on the TDM or MCMP circuit card must be available when adding a non modular TDM or MCMP the TDM Interface Cable or the Digital Bridge Interface Cable Specify which cable is required at the time of purchase To install or MCMP onto a Model 3611 DSU gt Procedure 1 Disconnect the DTE interface cable from the DSU It is not necessary to power down the carrier 2 Usea Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw holding the circuit pack lock
96. variety of ways For example if the DSU receives an out of service network code and is equipped with a DBM the data router may be commanded to route the aggregate data stream from the TDM or MCMP circuit card to the V 32 core to be transmitted over a dial backup connection to the DBM at the tributary site Port provides either a physical EIA 232 D V 24 or V 35 interface Ports 2 through 6 comply with a subset of EIA 232 interface recommendations The circuit leads supported on Ports 1 through 6 are discussed in Appendix C CARRIER DATA ROUTER PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 CONTROL AGGREGATE DATA PATH NOTE Throughout this document Port 1 refers to either the EIA 232 D V 24 or V 35 physical interface connectors on the DSU For non modular Model 3611 2505 operating in mode a TDM interface multiplexing cable attaches to the multiport connector on the TDM circuit card to provide fan out cabling to five individual 25 pin EIA 232 connectors Ports 2 through 6 The pin assignments for this cable are provided in Appendix C For modular Model 3611 or Model 3610 DSUs operating in TDM mode all port connectors are individual and a separate crossover cable is required for each connector DDS CIRCUIT DTE PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 TRIBUTARY 492 12840 01 Figure 4 3 TDM Architecture and Signal Flow core is any module that provides data transmiss
97. vary with the addition of DSU options DBM DBM V DBM S or DBM D TDM MCMP or SNA Diagnostic Interface However menu or selection displays may vary based upon the option that is installed NOTE Except where a distinction is made the term DCP refers to either type of diagnostic control panels DCP or SDCP 5 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Status Indicators The status indicators on the Model 3610 05175 DCP and on the Model 3611 DSU s faceplate continuously provide information on the current operating condition of the DSU All of the status indicators on the Model 3610 appear on its DCP whereas the status indicators of the carrier mounted Model 3611 DSU are spread across the following interfaces e SDCP e Faceplate of the Model 3611 DSU Figures 5 1 and 5 2 e Faceplate of the or MCMP circuit card Figures 5 1 and 5 2 Faceplate of the DBM V DBM S or DBM D if installed Figure 5 3 e Faceplate of the shared diagnostic unit SDU if installed Figures 5 1 and 5 2 show the faceplates of a Model 3611 DSU with the TDM option and a DSU with the MCMP option The DSU faceplate provides network DSU and DTE interface status the TDM or MCMP faceplate provides additional device status and port selection information Table 5 1 describes the function of the TDM and MCMP faceplate indicators The DBM V DBM S and DBM D circuit cards are used with a digital bridge for mult
98. was not run on an St port nn aggregate data path the Digital an Test was run on port nn e Trib Address if a control Blocks 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 27 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TIME TOT BLOCK TX BLK ERR RECEIVER COMPARATOR DTE RX TIMOUT NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTERFACE LOCAL DSU REMOTE DSU dumb Figure 5 11 End to End Test Results Tests originating from an NMS operating with DPII When the message Command Complete is displayed any key except the Zx key returns you to the End to End Test submenu where the Displ and Clr selections appear When the test is over the top line displays Final instead of Active Table 5 7 shows the information provided by an End to End Test protocol add the receive block errors to the receive time outs and return the results to NMS as receive block errors For an example refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide Table 5 7 End to End Test Results Results Reported By Information Displayed Time Local and Running test timer The Clr selection resets the timer to 0 00 00 remote DBM Tot Block Local and Number of blocks completed The Clr selection resets the remote DBM counter to 0 Rx err Local and Number of incoming blocks with errors detected indicating a remote DBM fault in the incoming transmission p
99. 0 ms 8 ms increments 5 5 Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments P5 6 FEPSh Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab MCMP option only DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab Available for TDM Flex with DSU firmware version 6 3x or greater Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No Upstrm Port Prti Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Prt3 Options Value Prt4 Options Value Prt5 Options Value AsyncSync Enab Disab Async Sync Enab Disab Async Sync Enab Disab Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Stop Bits 12 Stop Bits 1 2 Stop Bits 1 2 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 RTS Cntrl FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE TxCarrSel Const Ontrl TxCarrSel Const Ontrl TxCarrSel Const Ontrl RxCarrSel Const Ontrl Mark RxCarrSel Const Ontrl Mark RxCarrSel Const Ontrl Mark PCC Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab RTS CTS Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms incremen
100. 1 LADS Connection Distances Wire Gauge AWG Data Rate kbps 19 22 24 26 2 4 20 0 mi 16 6 mi 12 7 mi 9 4 mi 32 2 km 26 7 km 20 5 km 15 1 km 4 8 19 4 mi 12 7 mi 9 6 mi 7 1 mi 31 2 km 20 5 km 15 4 km 11 5 km 9 6 15 2 mi 9 7 mi 7 3 mi 5 6 mi 24 5 km 15 6 km 11 7 km 9 0 km 19 21 11 8 mi 7 5 mi 5 7 mi 4 2 mi 19 0 km 12 1 km 9 2 km 6 8 km 38 4 11 2 mi 6 5 mi 4 6 mi 3 2 mi 18 0 km 10 5 km 7 4 km 5 1 km 56 9 2 mi 5 4 mi 3 8 mi 2 8 mi 14 8 km 8 7 km 6 2 km 4 5 km 64 9 2 mi 5 4 mi 3 8 mi 2 8 mi 14 8 km 8 7 km 6 2 km 4 5 km 1 Power level is 10 dBm 4 48 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Point to Point LADS Two 3600 Series DSUSs that are connected by a 4 wire nonloaded metallic pair can support point to point LADS operation typical scenario involves two data devices located in the same building or in a campus environment Either the control or the tributary DSU can provide the internal clock source or timing can be taken from the external DTE Bridged LADS bridged LADS configuration can be used to provide a multipoint function Bridged LADS operation at speeds from 2 4 kbps to 64 kbps is possible through the digital bridge which is discussed in the Digital Bridge section of this chapter The digital bridge capability is achieved through the TDM or MCMP circuit card operating in Bridge mode Bridged LADS operation requires the following ha
101. 11 the alarm output is activated as well Any indicator that does not flash is not functional unless the circuit card is a non modular TDM or MCMP In this case the Alrm and OK LEDs do not flash To access the Lamp Test from the top level menu make the following selections Local Fl e Test DSU or DBM select active core Lamp Results If all LEDs are functioning all the indicators on the Model 3610 DSU s DCP or Model 3611 DSU s faceplate are flashing ON and Off steadily In a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier the indicators on the SDCP as well as the indicators on the Model 3611 DSU s faceplate flash ON and Off steadily The OK and Alrm LEDs do not flash ON and Off on a nonmodular TDM or MCMP faceplate one remains ON and one remains Off The LCD on the DCP flashes the following display until the test 15 aborted 0123456789 lt gt A A lt ri re gt If any character indicator appears nonfunctional the DCP should be replaced If any of the LEDs do not work the circuit card should be replaced Pressing any key except the key will stop LCD portion of the Lamp test and return you to the DSU or DBM Test menu to abort the test Once the test has been aborted the LCD and LEDs stop flashing Press the A key to return to DSU or DBM Tests menu or press the amp key to return to the top level menu Configuration Branch The Con
102. 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations The Add command is executed A message is sent to the control DSU asking that the tributary be added to the polling list The control DSU responds by acquiring the tributary DSU onto its polling list Acquiring the Poll List The first time the MCMP capability is activated on the network or after the network has been reconfigured the Acquire Poll List command must be issued from the control DSU s DCP to activate an initialization process During the initialization process the control DSU MCMP performs the following tasks Determines which tributaries are present on the network e Determines the roundtrip delay to each tributary e Loads whatever values have been assigned to the channel speed and asynchronous configuration options at the control DSU into each of the tributaries The initialization process typically takes less than 8 seconds to complete Once the control DSU determines the roundtrip delay for a tributary it sends that information to the tributary The tributary uses this information to determine when it should send data upon being polled by the FEP To acquire the Poll List press the E gt key once Displ Poll List A E Chang A eJ ejl Press the gt key to display Acq Acquir Poll List A Command Complete CA 8 All tributary addresses h
103. 1999 4 33 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units e Case 5 Aggregate switched backup for MCMP To establish a full backup send an sf command from circuits An MCMP circuit can be backed up using the 6800 Series NMS or Dial command from the DCP the aggregate switch capability of the DSU In to the control DSU The DSU disconnects from the DDS Figure 4 27 the control DSU should be configured line and derives its timing from the source specified in the so that AggrSwitch Aggregate Switch is enabled AgSw Timing configuration option and AgSw Timing Aggregate Switch Timing is set to the appropriate timing source to be used during dial backup The Bridge is configured so Brdg Timing Bridge Timing is set to Ext for Port 1 The DBM Ss are configured so that TxClkSource Transmit Clock Source is set to NOTE DDS In addition the DBM S connected to the During full backup switching for aggregate switch port must have Diag Type aggregate versions only Diagnostic Type set to None or Disr commands are routed over the aggregate port to the remote DSU or DBM Only two tests are available to test the DDS facility Digital Test DT and Bit Error Rate Test BERT The 6700 Series NMS provides two choices from the Dial Standby status Return to Lease or Return to Dial To establish a partial backup command the control DBMs to call the remote DBMs using the Dial command followed by the sf command from the 6800 Series NMS or Di
104. 2 18 0 16 8 14 2 Prt2 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 Stop Bits 1 2 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Disab 2 0 1 2 Disab RTS Ontrl FrcOn DTE Prt3 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 Prt3 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 TxCarrSel Const 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 I 120 2s 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 RxCarrSel Const Mark Disdb PCC Buffer Enab Disab Prt4 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 Prt4 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 als a 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 Elast Stor Enab Disab Disab 2 0 1 2 Disab RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments Prt5 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 Prt5 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 DTR Alarm Enab Disab 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Disab 2 0 1 2 Disab z Prt6 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 pines Fran Bisao 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 DSR on Tst Enab Disab
105. 2 Tributary Addressing via DDS Connections 4 40 4 33 Tributary Addressing via Backup Connections 4 41 4 34 Central Site Bridging Architecture 9 6 kbps Normal Operation with Partial Back p Passibles 255020 uqaqa 4 42 4 35 Central Site Bridging Architecture 9 6 kbps Partial Backup in Effect 4 43 4 36 Central Site Bridging Architecture 56 kbps Inactive Digital Bridge 4 44 4 37 Central Site Bridging Architecture 56 kbps Active Digital Bridge 4 45 4 38 Brdged LADS Operation ios ce heb e haer 4 50 4 39 Bridged LADS Architecture and Signal Flow 4 51 4 40 Digital Bridge DSU Interface RE RR REPRE boas 4 52 4 4 Sample Configuration and LPDA 2 Addressing 4 54 4 42 Dial Backup with LPDA 2 Configuration 4 55 4 43 Multipoint Dial Backup with LPDA 2 4 56 4 44 Multiplexing with TDM LPDA 2 Monitoring 4 57 4 45 Multiplexing with MCMP LPDA 2 Monitoring 4 57 4 46 Digital Sharing in a Point to Point Circuit 4 58 4 47 Digital Sharing in a Multipoint Circuit 4 59 4 48 Digital Sharing in a TDM Circuit LPDA 2 Monitoring 4 60 4 49 Digital Shar
106. 4 3 3 Non Modular MCMP Installation i 3 63 0 545065 660 oeand koti 3 9 3 4 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Real CORRER DRE ands 3 10 955 Modular TDM or MCMP Installation 3 11 42 Multipoint Transmission i252 RR ERES 4 3 4 2 Functional Representation of Point to Point Multiplexing 4 5 453 TDNMLArzchitect ure and Signal 44 13 35 saa rikte 4 7 4 4 Single Port Point to Point Circuit with Nondisruptive Diagnostics 4 8 4 5 Multipoint Async Compatible Network 4 9 4 6 522 4 10 4577 TOM with Extended Circuit 55 22 EA S 4 1 456 MERI P ERES HERES SU OE BEA pakaq 4 12 4 9 Multiplexing and Digital Sharing 4 13 4210 FEP Por Shari 4 15 4 11 1 32 Backup for Subrate DDS 2 2 gt eee 4 16 4 12 Case 2 V 32 Backup for High Speed DSU 4 17 4 13 3 V 32 Backup for DSU with Extended Circuits 4 18 4 14 Case 4 Switched 56 DBM Backup for DSU Operating at 56 kbps or Less 4 19 4 15 Case 5 Aggregate Switched Backup for T
107. 4 57 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Digital Sharing Figures 4 46 and 4 47 show how digital sharing is used with LPDA 2 monitoring When a digital sharing group is configured on a tributary DSU the DSU recognizes multiple LPDA 2 addresses instead of one The number of addresses 15 equal to the number of ports comprising the digital sharing group The tributary DSU answers to any LPDA 2 command containing one of the addresses The DTE connected to the digital sharing group must use consecutive PU addresses The group must start with Port 1 for the DSU to support LPDA 2 monitoring on each port of the sharing group A digital sharing group can be started on any other port but it will be ignored by the LPDA 2 protocol From the NetView operator s perspective the digital sharing feature appears as a unique DSU connected to each DTE The LPDA 2 address is set to the lowest PU address The DTE with the lowest PU address is then connected to Port 1 The DTE with the next consecutive PU address is connected to Port 2 and so on as shown in Figures 4 46 through 4 49 CARRIER NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS EET LPDA 2 CONTROL In Figures 4 46 and 4 48 directing a DSU CSU and Line Status command to LPDA 2 Address 4 will report the DTE status of Port 3 In Figures 4 47 and 4 49 directing a DSU CSU and Line Status command to LPDA 2 Address 4 will report the DTE status of Port 2 of the second tributary DSU NOTE
108. 610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Worksheets PORTA MM PET P TBSt Overview This appendix contains a complete set of Configuration Worksheets used for the 3600 Series DSU and its options Each is specific to the DSU s mode of operation TDM MCMP Bridge and Basic mode There is also Configuration Worksheet that applies to the DBM V DBM S or DBM D These sets include the following Configuration Worksheet for Mode which is used for the DSU with TDM This worksheet includes the DBM and SNA Diagnostic Interface options as well so no other worksheet is required Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode which is used for the DSU with MCMP This worksheet includes the DBM and SNA Diagnostic Interface options as well so no other worksheet is required Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode which is used for the DSU with TDM or MCMP This worksheet includes the SNA Diagnostic Interface option as well so no other worksheet is required Configuration Worksheet for Basic Mode which is used when the TDM or MCMP circuit card is disabled for the DSU without options or the DSU with only the DBM and or SNA Diagnostic Interface options e Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Mode which is used for the DBM V DBM S or DBM D that is connected to the TDM or MCMP operating in Bridge mode A Configuration Worksheet summarizes the DSU TDM s or
109. 8 8 19 2 18 8 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 PrtSp Kbps 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 18 0 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 Disr Type 2500 2600 3600s 3600e Br56 16 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab 4 4 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 Disab TxClkSource Int RXC Ext DDS Diagnostic DBM Options Value TxGlkSource t Int RXC Ext DSU Msg Clamp Enab Disab Diag Type Disr Mixed None CarrLossDisc T Yes No TxElasStor Enab Disab Auto Retrain T Yes No 2 Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 RxElastStor Enab Disab RemoteDiag V 54 Enhan 2500 Single Rate T Yes No 19 2 PowrLvl 6 0 10 AutoAnswer Enab Disab 64KScramblng On Off TxElasStor Enab Disab 64KLatchLpbk On Off Diagnostic General Options Value RxElasStor Enab Disab AggrSwitch Enab Disab Position Cntrl Trib G2Trb Call Setup None Pswrd Cllbk Alarm AgSw Timing Int Aggr Prt1 LinkConfg M Pt RxPwd Chang up to 10 digits V 54 Lpbk Enab Disab Resp Period 1 2 10 TxPwd Chang up to 10 digits TribTimOut Chang sec to min 5 secto 10 min V 13 Signl Enab Disab Beg Conn Be DU Dial Test Enab Disab General Options Value Link Delay 05 15 25 55 10s 205 505 Primary Core Yes No DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Network Delay 05 15 25 55 106 20s 505 DTRCallCon Orig Ansr Disab RTS FrcOn DTE Packet Delay 05 15 25 5s EchoCancel Enab Disab CTS Cntrl Std RTS M Pt SymPrt Enab Disab
110. 9 B 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units This page intentionally left blank B 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Worksheet for Mode 1 of 3 Date Location Local Phone Number Device Local Address DBM Installed Serial No Tributary Network Address SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Installed MUX Setup Options Value Options Prt1 Options Value Prt2 Options Value MUX Funct TDM TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg None AsyncoSync Enab Disab AsyncSync Enab Disab Share DevA Enab Disab Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Async Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Lowest Port 1 2 3 4 5 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Ports in Gp 2 3 4 5 6 Stop Bits 1 2 Stop Bits 1 2 Port Host 050 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Overspeed 1 25 2 5 Share DevB Enab Disab RTS FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE Lowest Porti 1 2 3 4 5 TxCarrSel Const Cntrl TxCarrSel Const Ports in Gp 2 3 4 5 6 RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark Port Cntrl Host DSD PCC Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab Disab P1 2 FEPSh Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab P3 4 FEPSh Enab Disab RTS CTS Chang 0 104
111. A2 GB41 60 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices instructions marked the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a 3 wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adaptor Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a 3 wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables whi
112. ABLES 5 DBM V 6 DBM V 7 PSTN 14400 BPS CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg 494 12898 04 Figure D 11 NMS Controlled Full Backup Configuration Dial Backup Active 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 21 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units As a result of a network failure in the backbone DDS network the control DSU reports a facility alarm to the NMS The operator at the NMS workstation is alerted by the alarm and examines the circuit s network map or circuit profile to see if backup is possible Supplementary information about the network addresses of the DBM Vs that are dedicated to the bridge and their remote DBM telephone numbers should also be in the circuit profile operator then issues an sf command and enters originate in the Standby Facility State field to the control DSU then a dial command followed by an sf command and originate in the Standby Facility State field to each of the DBM Vs A routine command can be created to issue the command sequence automatically The control DSU reports by activating the digital bridge and switching to internal timing Brdg Timing Int at the 14 4 kbps fallback rate Each DBM V responds by dialing a tributary DBM When connected the pair of DBMs the DBM V and its tributary DBM perform a handshake and exchange passwords and enter Data mode ready to send data After the tributary DSU DBM has answered the call each
113. ATION TIME SLOTS ONE BIT PER SLOT 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 QO2 2 gt r gt 77 4 0 INTERLEAVED DATA IN THE AGGREGATE DATA STREAM 491 12839 Figure 4 2 Functional Representation of Point to Point Multiplexing 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Speed Characteristics In time division multiplexing the speed of the DDS line must equal or exceed the combined speeds of digital signals to be transmitted at each DTE interface For example if the multiplexer in Figure 4 2 has five pairs of DTEs operating at 9 6 kbps and one pair of DTEs operating at 4 8 kbps for a combined speed of 52 8 kbps a DDS line speed of 56 kbps could accommodate all six pairs The portion of capacity dedicated to each pair of communicating DTEs constitutes a channel Asynchronous and Synchronous Sources The 3600 Series DSU operating in TDM mode can accommodate both asynchronous and synchronous sources Speeds of the two or six individual TDM ports Ports 1 through 6 can be set to 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 8 7 2 8 4 9 2 9 6 12 14 4 16 8 18 18 8 19 2 28 8 32 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps full duplex Possible asynchronous rates include all rates available to synchronous operation 1 2 through 64 kbps as stated above Asynchronous rates of 150 300 and 1200 bps are also supported but they require the allocation of 1200 bps The asynchronous speed of 600 and 1800 bps requi
114. C 5 V 35 Connector Port 1 Circuit Pin s V 35 CCITT Function B AB 102 Signal Ground SG 5 103a b Transmit Data TXD T BB 104a b Received Data RXD C CA 105 Request to Send RTS D CB 106 Clear to Send CTS CC 107 Data Set Ready DSR F CF 109 Received Line Signal Detect LSD H CD 108 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR HH Positive Test Voltage KK Negative Test Voltage U W DA 113a b Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source Y AA DB 114a b Transmitter Signal Element Timing DCE Source V X DD 115a b Receiver Signal Element Timing DCE Source J RI 125 Ring Indicator RI L LL 141 Local Loopback LL N RL 140 Remote Digital Loopback RL NN TM 142 Test Mode TM 1 Ring Indicator is only available on a DBM V DBM S or DBM D at this time 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 99 16294 Figure C 4 Modular DSU V 35 Adapter 3000 F1 510 C 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 6 Model 3610 Ports 2 6 and Modular DSU 25 Pin V 35 Connector 25 Pin Connector 34 Pin Connector Model 3610 Modular DSU Ports 2 6 V 35 Adapter Circuit Name Pin Number Pin Number 7 B Signal Ground 4 C Request to Send RTS 5 D Clear to Send CTS 6 E Data Set Ready DSR 8 F Received Line Signal Detect LSD 20 H Data Terminal Ready DTR 21 J Ring Indicator RI
115. DM Circuits Configuration 4 20 4 16 Typical Parallel NeDWOIKS EE UK HE EROR ERU GR OPE ERROR 4 21 4 17 Applications Combined on One DDS Multipoint Circuit with MCMP 4 22 4 18 MCMP Architecture and Signal FloW oe Rc o Robo cR 4 24 4 19 MCMP with Independent Channels 4 26 4 20 MCMP with Digital Sharing acean ctos dn Rabe on fter deed e RP RC s 4 27 4 21 Case 1 Dedicated MCMP Backup with Switched 56 DBMs 4 28 4 22 Case 2 Backing Up the Channels to the Most Important Tributary Location 4 29 4 23 Case 3 Backing Up One Complete Channel Partial Backup 4 30 4 24 Case 3 Backing Up One Complete Channel Full Backup 4 31 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 iii COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Figure Page 4 25 4 Backing Up Up to Three Channels via the FEP Port Sharing Feature 4 32 4 26 Digital Bridge DCE Interface esce ced ther Roe que ake OER e GOR 4 33 4 27 Aggregate Switched Backup for MCMP Circuit Configuration 4 34 4 28 Multipoint with Digital Bridging 4 35 4 29 Maximum Bridging Capability Up to 20 Bridging Ports 4 36 4 30 Broadcasting Data Through the Digital Bridge 4 37 4 31 Multipoint DDS Circuit an Partial 2222222222 2 55 4 39 4 3
116. DM or MCMP are also changed relative to the data paths in place during TDM or MCMP mode of operation When the TDM or MCMP is configured as a digital bridge it can be used in conjunction with the control DSU to support multipoint LADS operation dedicated multipoint dial backup or expanded digital sharing If a DBM is installed it must be disabled or removed to operate in Bridge mode 4 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation i i i to six point to point circuits via a single DDS line Time Division Multiplexing Figure 4 2 This single DDS line is able to carry six Since transmission facilities are expensive and separate channels by interleaving the data on each channel frequently two or more low speed point to point into time slots of the high speed aggregate data stream applications can share a high speed digital facility it is The receiving TDM with the aid of framing bits more efficient to share that capacity This sharing is separates demultiplexes the data according to channel provided by 3600 Series DSUs equipped with a TOM and delivers the data to the appropriate output ports Each operating in TDM mode pair of communicating DTEs must be operating at the same speed data rate A pair of 3600 Series DSUs with TDM or MCMP operating in TDM mode can provide the equivalent of up AGGREGATE DATA STREAM DTE DTE a Q m Q CQ I ONE LINK 6 CHANNELS FULL DUPLEX OPER
117. DSU switches the DTE s data to its DBM After all calls are completed full restoration is accomplished at 14 4 kbps The DBM Vs provide valid call setup messages to the NMS If the NMS does not receive a valid call setup message from a DBM V the NMS operator issues another dial command followed by the sf command and originate in the Standby Facility State field to the DBM V This completes the backup circuit and the host computer can restart the network polling When backup is completed the FEP line may be restarted if necessary During backup the DSU still reports the facility alarm to the NMS When the failure is corrected and the DDS network is restored the alarm is turned Off at the workstation s Alarm Monitor window You can request an aggregate Digital Test to one of the tributary DSUs to ensure that the DDS network is working correctly To end the backup session via the NMS issue disconnect commands to the control DSU and all its DBM Vs The NMS restores all control and tributary DSUs to the DDS network and drops all dial backup calls by issuing an sf command and release in the Standby Facility State field to the control DSU and an sf command and release in the Standby Facility State field command followed by a dial and a q command in the Number to Dial field to each DBM associated with the digital bridge To end the backup session via the SDCP address the control DSU and each DBM by issuing the DrBu drop backup command
118. DTE interface cable from the DSU and disconnect the multiport cable from the TDM or For a modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit this step is not necessary It is not necessary to power down the carrier Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw holding the circuit pack lock on the DSU faceplate and rotate the lock to the open position Figure 3 5 Pull out and down on the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP securing latches and start sliding the unit out of the carrier Pull the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit free of the carrier and lay it on a clean ESD workpad Onthe TDM or MCMP side of the unit remove the screws securing the standoff posts to the TDM or MCMP circuit card For a non modular unit there are three screws and standoff posts Figure 3 3 for a modular unit there are four screws and standoff posts Figure 3 5 Carefully compress the heads of the two snaplock posts to disengage them from the TDM or MCMP circuit card Then carefully work the TDM or MCMP circuit card free from the snaplock posts and double ended pin header If a TDM or MCMP is to be removed from service contact your service representative to return the TDM or MCMP circuit as described in the Equipment Warranty and Support section of Chapter 1 If you wish to install another TDM or MCMP circuit card refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 13
119. Disab 2 0 1 2 Disab Extend Chan Yes No Underspeed Disab Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Underspeed Disab Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 DTE 232 V 35 Diagnostic DBM Value 7 Options Diagnostic General Value DSU Options alue Diag Type Disr Mixed None Options Rate Kpbs 64 64L 56 38 4 19 2 9 6 4 8 2 4 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 Position Trib G2Trb TxClkSource Int DDS Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 RemoteDiag V 54 Enhan 2500 LinkConfig Pt Pt Msg Clamp Enab Disab Resp Period 1 2 10 TxElasSt Enab Disab Trib TimOut Chang min and sec xElasStor nab Disal DOE pou Value Diag Conn CC DC RxElastStor Enab Disab ptions TEE 19 2 PowrLvi 46 0 10 Diag Type NonD Disr Mixed None Link Delay 06 1s 25 5s 10s 20s 505 e x 7 2nd Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 Network Delay Os 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s cramblin n Disr 2500 2500 36005 3600 Br56 Packer Delay Oe 15 55 95 64KLatchLpbk On Off M Pt SymPrt Enab Disab A itch E Di Fast Sel Enab Disab ggrSwitc nab Disab Available for TDM Flex with DSU firmware version 6 3x or greater AgSw Timing Int Aggr Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 V 54 Lpbk Enab Disab Configuration Worksheet for Mode 3 of 3
120. Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig Pt Pt DBM Rate Kbps N A for control 14 4 for tributary TxClkSource Ext for control RXC for tributary CarrLossDisc N A for control Yes for tributary Auto Retrain N A for control Yes for tributary Single Rate N A for control Yes for tributary AutoAnswer Enab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password Primary Core Yes for control No for tributary DTRCallCon N A for control Disab for tributary Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl FrcOn Bkup Auto Bckup Disab AutoRestor Disab 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units D 34 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Index B abort adapter V 35 C 12 adding TDM MCMP model 3610 model 3611 JB 6 address control DSU 4 53 addressable devices number of 1 4 addresses valid addressing LPDA 24 53 4 54 multipoint backup tributary 4 40 H 41 aggregate switch switched backup MCMP circuit 4 34 TDM circuit switching applications TDM architecture bridged LADS central site bridging 4 43 4 44 4 45 MCMP 4 24 multipoint backup 4 42 TDM assembling dissassembling TOM MCMP 2 5 assigning address control DSU 4 53 tributary DSU async terminal control 1 3 async compatible network multipoint 4 9 asynchronous operation 1 3 1 4 sources automatic DDS restoration partial
121. Ground Connected Disconected LPDA 2 Enab Disab Ext Leads ExtLd Rate RPower Signal Ground LPDA Address Chang 1 256 CCN by EL Enab Disab Test Mode Indication Enable Disable SNA Backup Enab Disab SW Vers 3 22 4 41 Normal Code 1 Chang AnswExtBU Enab Disab ChgMd Options Value Code 2 Chang RLSD in MCMP Yes No Mode ADp DMC T Not available if a Switched 56 DBM Appears when non Flex MUX MCMP installed or DSU firmware version less than 6 3x Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode 1 of 2 Date Location Local Phone No Device Local Address DBM Installed Serial No Tributary Network Address SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Installed MUX Setup Options Value Prt2 Options Value Prt3 Options Value MUX Funct TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg None RTS Cntrl FrcOn DTE RTS FrcOn DTE CBrdg or EBrdg TxCarrSel Const Ontrl TxCarrSel Const Cntrl Brdge Rate DSU 56 19 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 4 8 2 4 RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark RxCarrSel Const Cntrl Mark Brdg Timing Int Auto Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 PCC Buffer Enab Disab PCC Buffer Enab Disab Share DevA EDAM Elast Stor Enab Disab Elast Stor Enab Disab Lowest Porta POE 2 314S RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments
122. H FOR TDM BRIDGE MODE The DTE cabling for the MCMP capability is the same cabling used for the TDM capability For non modular Model 3611 DSUs operating in MCMP mode the TDM interface cable attaches to the multiport connector on the MCMP circuit card to provide cabling to five individual EIA 25 pin connectors This cable is six feet long and each fan out section is one foot long See Appendix C for pin assignments For modular Model 3611 DSUs or Model 3610 DSUs operating in MCMP mode all port connectors are individual and a separate crossover cable is required for each connector AGGREGATE DATA PATH MULTICHANNEL MULTIPOINT CIRCUITRY AGGREGATE PATH FOR MCMP MODE MULTICHANNEL MULTIPOINT CIRCUITRY 492 12998 01 Figure 4 18 MCMP Architecture and Signal Flow 4 24 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation MCMP Operation For proper MCMP operation the network must be initialized with the tributary DSUs added to the control DSU s poll list Each newly installed circuit should be verified as a working single port multipoint circuit per Technical Publication 62310 1987 prior to the MCMP capability being activated to ensure that the DSUs operate properly Initialization The first time the MCMP capability is activated on the network or after the network has been reconfigured the Acquire Poll List command must be issued from the control DSU s DCP or from NMS to start the initialization proc
123. I es db dps 4 1 Disital SHAN bt a ade ob ebd ad 4 11 M lliplexine and Digital Shame u l bbc te ob 4 13 SPI sya oasis Yash lexus ades arb 4 14 TDM Backup km e ieee versenden cs REO x C REC re PEL EET ETIN 4 16 Multichannel Multipoint ua secre eher RR wd RR mee er Ea ole 4 21 Line and Channel Speeds uu u u deka eed ti ER pis ee ote aceto acea 4 23 MCMP Overhead Composition Lee CAFE eb DUBIE Reed Dd Cas 4 23 Manseement Chantel c one dee eere ert oup seceded coe ez aa lac 4 23 In Band Secondary Channel Transport cere emeret llasa amia 4 23 Number ob P Ee ded 4 23 MCMP Architecte racks 4 24 MCMP Operation edere Sea hacerte 4 25 ieee 4 25 Supaya kasanku setulae 4 25 Switched Cartier Eamulatioli Ve epe edere 4 25 MCMP Applications eck Sea sea E A erp a Ub P Var iat 4 25 MOMP ARI ROC Rb Cp I see FRI C tI Ee WERE rar Ee 4 26 MCMP with Digital Sha
124. LATCH FACEPLATE STANDOFF POST P 2900 OD CIRCUIT LOCK LATCH CLOSED Figure 3 3 Non Modular or MCMP Installation STANDOFF POST 492 13006 03 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Installing a Modular TDM or MCMP This section describes the procedure for adding a modular TDM or MCMP circuit card onto a Modular 3611 DSU and then into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A connector module which is supplied with each modular TDM or MCMP card has six ports labeled Port 1 through Port 6 The connector module is shown on the right in Figure 3 4 When the connector module is installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier you can remove the modular DSU with a TDM or MCMP without disconnecting the DTE cables at the rear of the carrier Each port on the connector module is a DB25 connector which provides the EIA 232 DTE interface In addition a 26 pin high density D type connector is located at the top of the connector module which provides the V 35 interface for either Port 1 or an aggregate data path This connector requires a 6 port V 35 Interconnect Cable which converts the 26 pin high density D type interface to the standard V 35 34 pin interface The 6 port V 35 Interconnect Cable part number 035 0174 0031 must be ordered separately HIGKDENSITY ORCUN DENSITY DTE 8 IRCUIT 6 PORT V CONNECTOR CARD INTERFACE C
125. M V as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Mode Diag DBM Diag Type Disr RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt M Pt SymPrt Disab DBM Rate Kbps 9 6 PrtSp Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource Ext CarrLossDisc Yes Auto Retrain Yes Single Rate Yes AutoAnswer Enab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Primary Core Yes DTRCallCon Orig EchoCancel Disab Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl FrcOn CTS Cntrl Std AntiStream Disab LSD Lead Std CTS Lead Std DSR FrcOn Enab DSR on Tst Enab Circ Assur Disab LL by DTE Disab RL by DTE Disab DTR Alarm Disab Bkup Auto Bckup Disab BckupOnCMI Disab AutoRestor Disab Backup Dir enter Dir number 1 to 10 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Set the configuration options for automatic partial Bkup backup of the tributary DSU as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic Mode Auto Bckup Enab e DSU Rate Kbps 9 6 PrtSp Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Mixed Disr Type 3600e Diag DBM Diag Type Mixed RemoteDiag Enhan e Diag Gen Position Trib LinkConfig M Pt Resp Period 1 M Pt SymPrt Disab e DBM Rate Kbps 9 6 PrtSp Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource RXC CarrLossDisc Yes Auto Retrain Yes Single Rate Yes AutoAnswer E
126. MP capability is now functional with all tributary DSUs on the control DSU s MCMP poll list At this point DSU ports can be assigned to MCMP channels through the Port Speed PrtSp selection from the Configuration Options Opts submenu 2 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation Adding a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex to an Installed Model 3610 DSU This section describes the procedure for adding a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex upgrade for the Model 3610 DSU The time division multiplexer TDM Flex or multichannel multipoint MCMP Flex upgrade for the Model 3610 standalone DSU includes a circuit card that rests in an expanded base with an expanded rear panel If this upgrade is to be installed on a DSU with firmware version 6 3x or greater each port Port 1 or Port 2 for the 2 port version or Ports 1 through 6 for the 6 port version can be configured independently to operate as an EIA 232 or V 35 interface via the DCP an async terminal or a 6700 or 6800 Series NMS If the upgrade is to be installed on a DSU with firmware version less than 6 3x Switch S1 must be changed to switch all ports from EIA 232 to V 35 operation Only the 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex can be used with DSUs with firmware version DSU SW ver less than 6 3x 2 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex is not supported If installing a 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex and your DSU has a wall mount ac transformer a table top transformer must be ordered
127. ONNECTOR INTERCONNECT CABLE FERRITE CHOKE 25 PIN EIA 232 V 24 INTERFACE CO NEC NNECTOR Zi 34 PIN V 35 INTERFACE 6 PORT CONNECTOR MODULE 25 PIN V 35 INTERFACE FERRITE CHOKES OR DIGITAL TIE BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE 493 14112 01 Figure 3 4 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Rear 3 10 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation To remove the installed Modular 3611 DSU gt Procedure 1 Usea Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw holding the circuit pack lock on the Modular 3611 DSU and rotate the lock to the open position Figure 3 5 PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW SNAPLOCK POST PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW 3611 DSU BAND FACEPLATE amp al NOTCH WN PHILLIPS BOREW DOUBLE ENDED PIN HEADER 3 CIRCUIT amp e Jm AK as SNAPLOCK N POST N 2022 OO LATCH OST CIRCUIT PACK LOCK LATCH CLOSED 2 down on the latch at the bottom of the modular DSU s faceplate until the circuit card starts to come out of its slot in the carrier Pull the circuit card free of the carrier and set the DSU on a clean ESD anti static workpad 3 Atthe rear of the carrier Figure 3 4 disconnect the DTE interface cable from the rear connector plate it is not necessary to power down the carrier
128. ORT 6 PORT 2 LOCAL DSU LORSPBAGN REMOTE DSU 492 12876 01 Figure 5 8 Remote Digital Loopback 5 22 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations In a point to point network only Remote Digital Loopback can also be initiated by the DTE by raising Pin 21 of the E A 232 D V 24 interface or Pin of the V 35 interface provided the Remote Digital Loopback by DTE RL by DTE configuration option is enabled When testing a DBM the DBM must be in Dial Backup mode to realize this capability The Remote Digital Loopback command is not available when the LPDA 2 configuration option is enabled NOTE If the Bilat Lpbk Bilateral Loopback configuration option is enabled requesting a Remote Digital Loopback on a port automatically initiates a DTE Loopback on the port as well Requesting an aggregate Remote Digital Loopback automatically initiates a DTE Loopback on all of the ports To access Remote Digital Loopback from the top level menu make the following selections Local Fl e Test DBM select active core e Lpbk Port Select when not operating in single port mode e Trib Address multipoint control DBM only For TDM or MCMP mode the following additional menu appears Port Number A Pri Prt2 CA Prt Prt5 Aggr In TDM or MCMP mode raising Pin 21 on Port 1 initiates an aggregate loopback This loopback is performed on the DDS circuit unless
129. P Bridge mode MUX Funct CBrdg or EBrdg or Basic mode MUX Funct None TDM and Bridge modes are available to a DSU with TDM TDM MCMP and Bridge modes are available to a DSU with MCMP The DSU operates in Basic mode when the TDM or MCMP circuit card is disabled Funct the TDM or MCMP circuit card s function is the MUX Setup configuration option as it is displayed in the Configuration Confg branch of the DCP menu The functions available in this section are TDM MCMP CBrdg or EBrdg or None Basic Each mode offers a unique set of configuration options Basic Mode For a DSU with TDM or MCMP disabling the TDM or MCMP capability MUX Funct None places the DSU in Basic mode just as if there were no TDM or MCMP circuit card attached to the DSU TDM Mode In TDM mode data paths are established between the DSU and TDM to increase the port capacity of the DSU to six ports All six ports can be configured for multiplexing digital sharing or a combination of both A 3600 Series DSU with TDM can also be equipped with a dial backup module DBM either the V 32 DBM or a Switched 56 DBM for point to point dial backup MCMP Mode In MCMP mode the same data paths are established as in the TDM mode of operation plus the multichannel multipoint circuitry is activated on the MCMP circuit card Bridge Mode In Bridge mode all ports are assigned to one digital sharing group The data paths between the DSU and T
130. Prt3 C Prt4 C Prt5 and Prt6 None e DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl for control Trib for tributary LinkConfig M Pt e Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Control FrcOn 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 25 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DATA CENTER B 19 2 KBPS KBPS 19 2 KBPS 2 48 __ CARRIER 3 4 MCMP 5 DDS 56 KBPS DDS 4 8 KBPS RETAIL BRANCHES 19 2 KBPS TRIBUTARY SITE 1 19 2 KBPS 3 MCMP 4 5 6 TRIBUTARY SITE 2 aloo EEEE 7j DSU TRIBUTARY M 4 8 KBPS lg 494 12861 02 ome aoa 25D D 7j DSU TRIBUTARY Figure D 12 MCMP using FEP Port Sharing Configuration D 26 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Dedicated MCMP Backup with Switched 56 DBMs This scenario describes the Switched 56 kbps dial backup of an MCMP circuit Figure D 13 The assumed configuration for this scenario is as follows e Network is a 2 drop multipoint circuit operating at 56 kbps e Customer wishes dial backup to be initiated from and controlled by the NMS for this example however it could be done automatically e Two central si
131. R D 30 Ove rview Configuration options are grouped by their option This appendix presents a subset of various configuration scenarios for TDM digital bridge and applications these examples are not inclusive of all possible configurations Each scenario consists of an illustration an explanation of the configuration shown and the applicable configuration option settings needed to support that scenario Refer to Chapter 5 for additional configuration information When reviewing the configuration options keep the following in mind A set of configuration options is provided for each type of unit e g a control or a central site bridge shown in an illustration e The Configuration Worksheet you would use to record the unit s configuration is identified set the set of configuration options that can be edited under the Opts submenu DSU Diag DBM etc Option sets as well as the configuration options are presented in the order you will see them option sets are bulleted and in bold with one exception when the TDM or MCMP option is installed the and PrtSp option set settings are configured first Note N A means Not Applicable Only applicable configuration options are listed unlisted configuration options are left at their default settings or are forced to a value based upon other configuration option settings Individual configuration options are shown as they appear on the
132. Remot DBM 2 wire 4 wire AntiStream Chang Disab 1 100 sec Fast Sel Enab Disab LSD Lead Std Delay FrcOn CTS Lead Std Delay FrcOn Backup Options Value T Not available if a Switched 56 DBM Switched 56 DBM only DSR FrcOn Enab Disab Auto Bckup Enab Disab Tt Not available if Primary Core is No 2 wire Switched 56 DBM only SystemStat Enab Disab Backup Dir Chang 1 10 DSR Tst Enab Disab BckupOnCMI Enab Disab Backup Directory Dial String Circ Assur Enab Disab AutoRestor Enab Disab 1 Tst Pattern AT amp T Std NtwkTimOut Chang min and Sec 1 to 30 min 2 RespondRDL Enab Disab RestorTimOut Chang min and sec 1 to 60 min 3 LL by DTE Enab Disab TriesTimeOut Chang min and sec 1 to 60 min 4 RL by DTE Enab Disab MultiCall Enab Disab 5 Bilat Lpbk Enab Disab 6 Ext Leads ExtLd Rate RPowr ChgMd Options Value 7 CCN by EL Enab Disab Mode ADp DMC 8 DTR Alarm Enab Disab 9 SW Vers 3 22 4 41 Normal Hardware Straps Value 10 AnswExtBU Enab Disab DDD Interface t Permissive Programmable LPDA 2 Options Value AsyncSync Enab Disab Frame Ground Signal Ground Connected Disconnected LPDA 2 Enab Disab AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Test Mode Indication Enabled Disabled LPDA Address Chang 1 256 Stop Bits 1 2 SNA Backup Enab Disab Overspeed 1 0 2 3 Code 1 Chang Code 2 Chang Date Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Location
133. SEIBUSESV DBM Ds DEDICATED TO MULTIPOINT DIAL BACKUP FAILURE E C 1 TRIBUTARY II imm EH J ws e 2000A TRIBUTARY DSU WITH DIGITAL BRIDGE CONTROL MAY SAME CARRIER WITH DSU TRIBUTARY 494 12853 02 Figure 4 31 Multipoint DDS Circuit in Partial Backup 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 39 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Multipoint Backup Addressing For central site multipoint dial backup configuration the digital bridge is controlled by the control DSU Each central site DBM V DBM S or DBM D in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has its own physical address which is determined by the carrier number slot number and used only for commands issued from the SDCP In addition each DBM V DBM S or DBM D has a unique network address in the 1 to 255 range When not in dial backup the tributary DBMs have network addresses under the control DSU and at the same level as the tributary DSU Figure 4 32 The term under as used here means that the sequential address begins FROM NMS CARRIER DTE PORT PORT 1 DIGITAL BRIDGE with the control channel followed by the slash delimiter and the DSU network address followed by the slash delimiter and the tributary DBM network address e g 1 1 4 in Figure 4 32 When in dial backup the tributary DBMs retain the same address and are also addressable as tributaries of the centr
134. Share DevB Disab 2 and Prt3 Prt4 through Prt6 N A RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU TxElastStor Enab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Disr Disr Type 3600e Diag Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt e Gen DTE Port V 35 Set configuration options for automatic partial backup using the tributary Switched 56 DBMs DBM Ss or DBM Ds as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Mode Diag DBM Diag Type Disr RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt DBM AutoAnswer Enab TxElasStor Enab RxElasStor Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password Primary Core Yes DBM Ss or DBM Ds only DTRCallCon Orig Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl FrcOn CTS Cntrl Std AntiStream Disab LSD Lead Std CTS Lead Std DSR FrcOn Disab Bkup Auto Bckup Disab AutoRestor Disab 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units MCMP Backup Using FEP Port Sharing This configuration provides backup of two to three channels Figure D 14 When the remote DBM dials into the control DBM Vs the remote DBM automatically reverts to TDM mode and adjusts its port speeds when the dial backup speed is less than the MCMP aggregate speed Figure D 15 Port speeds are adjusted using the DBM port speed options The assumed con
135. Since the DSU is not connected to the network the red Alrm indicator is lit and the LCD displays No Signal indicating a facility alarm The LCD displays health and status information The red Alarm LED lights when there is no DDS signal NOTE If the test fails again call your service representative to return the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit refer to Chapter 1 in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide Network Diagnostic Connection The DSU may be set up for a diagnostic interface with the NMS using a 3600 Hubbing Device For further information about installing a hubbing device or connecting to a router or async terminal refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide Software Configuration A default software configuration is loaded in the DSU at the factory If the TDM is installed the Model 3610 DSU is configured as a tributary with TDM mode enabled and Port 1 set to operate at 9 6 kbps If the MCMP is installed the DSU is configured as a tributary with MCMP mode enabled and Port 1 set to operate at 9 6 kbps Software configurations can be changed from the DCP an async
136. T RE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Table of Contents Preface About ths GUJE ue caos Rho o a REO e os vii Howto Usethis Guides assasi EROR RUP RO tse Rm e On vii Related Dochi u au ukyu u dos bi Odd gues viii Relerenee DOGcUmellis Ras ur ast viii 1 Overview PREX Ie PRESTO PR 1 1 Standard PARS 1 2 Opbi6onal Features 1 2 Models e rM 1 6 ET e EET 1 9 Government Requiremenls i PER 1 9 Equipment Warranty and Support ah een 1 9 2 Model 3610 Installation OVEN 2 1 Hardware Straps ose mcr oreet ESET 2 2 Changing Hardware Settings 2 ehe 2 4 Electrical exero 2 8 Network Diagnostic Connection roars ee aww Ers 2 10 software COnhipurglion P Oe Reb ee des 2 10 Network and LADS Connections 2 11 DSU DTE Conmechon 2 11 Verihication TESINE acaso m kt 2 12 Adding a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex to an Installed Model 3610 DSW eis ate RO ae head 2 13 Getting ER OPER
137. T Technical Reference 41458 AT amp T Technical Reference 61330 AT amp T Technical Reference 62310 1987 Bell Canada DCTE Specifications Bell Communications Research Technical Reference Publication 41028 CCITT V 35 ISO 2593 EIA 232 D V 24 ISO 2110 Integrated Network Corporation Compatibility Bulletin CB INC 101 Northern Telecom NIS 5204 29 1986 Pacific Bell PUB L 780035 PB NB Pacific Bell PUB L 780036 PB NB viii March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Overview cnl TT 1 1 MM CET 1 2 Op onn SAME Sis Mu a a yet n e atre Mus aN 1 2 DSU with TDM Capability cist ie eme 9e rere ERE PPP FO EE VERRE 1 2 DSU vih MCMP Capability ee rede aee eds 1 4 DSU with Digital Bridge Capability ecce eee Cr pr Race aee dos 1 5 DSU with LPDA 2 Interoperability and 1 5 hoc 1 6 Model 3610 with TDM ot MCMED qt bee eate 1 6 Model 3611 with TOM ot MCMIE wees 1 6 Models 3610 and 3611 with SNA Diagnostic Interface 1 6 DBM DT 1 9 jns Mc 1 9 DBM M 1 9 Jp D MMC TIT 1 9 Government Requirements 52255228 66 RR RR ERR REESE 1 9 Equipment Warranty and Support elle n kh rem r
138. TER gt NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 3 DIE PORT 4 INTERFACE PORT 6 492 12875a Figure 5 9 Bilateral Loopback 5 24 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Digital Test Digital Test DT is used to check the functionality of a pair of DSUs DBMs and the data circuit between the pair The local DBM transmits the 511 bit test pattern over the network to the remote DBM for an operator specified length of time Figure 5 10 The remote DBM receives the test pattern and loops it back to its transmitter before the DTE interface and returns it to the local DBM The test pattern is then passed to the DSU s comparator to be checked for errors At the conclusion of the test the local DBM releases the remote DBM from Digital Loopback When a Digital Test is performed on a specific port data transmission is not affected on the other ports When CBrdg or AggrSwitch is enabled the test is performed over the DDS link not the dialed link NOTE The Digital Test command is not available when the LPDA 2 configuration option is enabled For a DSU operating in single port mode and having either nondisruptive diagnostics or rate adaption in effect an additional selection for Aggr Aggregate or 1 Port 1 appears Selecting Aggr allows only the test pattern data to propagate the looped data path In band secondary channel transport data is not allowed to avoid disrupt
139. Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab Extend Chan Vas No Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No Upstrm Port Prti Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode 2 of 2 Diagnostic General Options valke Position Cntrl LinkConfig Pt Pt Resp Period 1 2 10 Trib TimOut Chang secto min Diag Conn CC DC Link Delay Os 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s Network Delay Os 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s Packet Delay 05 15 25 55 M PtSymPrt Enab Disab Fast Sel Enab Disab General Options Value LPDA 2 Options Value DTE Port EIA232 V 35 LPDA 2 Enab Disab RTS Cntrl FrcOn LPDA Address Chang 1 256 CTS Std RTS SNA Backup Enab Disab LSD Lead STD Delay FrcOn Code 1 Chang CTS Lead STD Delay FrcOn Code 2 Chang SystemStat Enab Disab Circ Assur Enab Disab Tst Pattern AT amp T Std Hardware Straps Value RespondRDL Enab Disab DDD Interface Permissive Programmable LL by DTE Enab Disab Frame Ground Connected Disconected RL by DTE Enab Disab Signal Ground Bilat Lpbk Enab Disab Test Mode Indication Enable Disable Ext Leads ExtLd Rat
140. V DBM S or DBM S is addressed just as DBM is addressed via an NMS or the SDCP Likewise configuration options are set just as they are set for a DBM Refer to Chapter 5 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide for in depth instructions on how to set DBM configuration options and issue dial backup commands from the SDCP Use DBM configuration option Single Rate set to Yes to configure the DBM Vs so the call is not set at a lesser speed if line impairments are encountered Each DBM pair cannot be independent If one dial back line is set up at a lower speed its speed will not be the same as the other ports on the digital bridge and it can no longer communicate If the DBMs encounter line impairments the DBMs drop the present call and attempt to place a new one 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 45 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DBM V DBM S DBM D Dial on DTR Capability When the central site loses access to its remote DSUs the DBM Vs DBM Ss and DBM Ds can initiate backup based upon the state of the DBM s DTR lead To activate this capability set the Primary Core configuration option to Yes and set the DTRCallCon configuration option to Orig Then the DBM V DBM S DBM D originates a backup call when DTR is raised and drops the call when DTR goes low For additional information refer to Configuration Option
141. VEL MENU 10 Address Read Clear 3 7 7a Stat Bekup H S DTE CircQ 710 DSU DBM Port Select Abort Devic 10 gg3 0 BERT Lamp 3 Start Start Start Devic Expan Subn Subn Selective Port Port Central Site Select Select Bridge or Aggregate DBM 8a 8a Switch Installed Central Site Address Address Bridge or Aggregate Switch Run Blocks 2 Tim AggSw Bkup DrBU DBM 12598 pres gp 219 Dsp Ad Bridge T DBM D Pot Pote Por Switch Bridge Select Select Select Activated Backup Aggr Sw 8a Partial Address Backup 1 Idle Mode Standby Mode Dial Backup Mode Bkup Dial DrBU gt DDS 1 If Message Pending l l 2 Trib Only l 3 Local Only 4 Dial Idle Standby Mode DSU Only Mode 6 or MCMP Option Only Standby 6a Does not display if MUX None Mode 7 DBM DBM V DBM S or DBM D Option Only 7 DBM Originates Digital Bridge 8 DBM V DBM S or DBM D Not Available Disc gt Dial Not Active DBM V DBM S or DBM D DBM Address TDM Mode 8b DBM V DBM S or DBM D Configuration Digital Bridge Mode SNADiagnostic nterface Option Idle Dial MCMP Mode 10 Not available if Diagnostics None Mode Backup Basic Mode It Diagnostics Nondisruptive or Mixed Mode 494 14331 02 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60
142. Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds are dedicated to a single DSU Digital bridging of the DTE input output signals on Port 1 of the control DSU is performed by the TDM or MCMP circuit card The circuit card broadcasts Port 1 DTE data to the central site DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds and accepts data from them when they are in dial backup Multipoint dial backup requires the following hardware when there are five or fewer drops e One Model 3611 DSU configured as a control e One TDM MCMP circuit card configured as a digital bridge One DBM V DBM S or DBM D per drop at the central site The modules do not need to be adjacent to the TDM or MCMP circuit card or even in the same carrier as the or A digital bridge interface or crossover cable between the digital bridge ports and the DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds is required e One DBM in each tributary DSU One TDM or MCMP circuit card operating in Bridge mode can provide dial backup for up to five tributary DSUs Bridges can be extended to provide dial backup for up to 20 tributary DSUs see the Digital Bridge section of this chapter and Appendix D Configuration Scenarios for more information 4 38 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE NON MODULAR OR CROSSOVER CABLES EC TRIBUTARY nue MODULAR CIRCUITS MP f ow E C FIVE DBM Vs DBM Ss OR
143. a Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide and the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide Optional Features This manual discusses the 3600 Series DSU with the TDM or MCMP option it also includes discussion of DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds which are used in digital bridging applications Most diagnostic tests and commands available to a 3600 Series DSU without the TDM or MCMP option are also available with the TDM or MCMP option Control of TDM MCMP digital bridge session can be performed from the DCP from an Async Asynchronous Terminal or from a COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS Options that provide point to point dial backup capability and LPDA 2 interoperability without the TDM or MCMP option are discussed in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide DSU with TDM Capability TDM capability allows up to six independent ports to share one standard digital point to point facility TDM capability provides the following features Port capacity The option allows up to six independent ports One port is provided on the DSU and five EIA 232 ports are provided on the TDM circuit card For a Modular 3611 DSU V 35 interface is at the top of the 6 port connector module There are two versions
144. a rate of one of the channels In Band Secondary Channel Transport The MCMP capability supports in band secondary channel transport between the control and tributary DSUs that can transport diagnostics without disrupting user transmitted data Some tests transmitted over the in band secondary channel transport may result in primary channel disruptions when the test is executed i e a Device Test to a tributary DSU There is no routine health and status polling unless configured for nondisruptive diagnostics Number of Tributaries The MCMP capability can support up to 40 addressable tributary devices 40 DSUs or 20 DSUs with DBMs 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 23 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Architecture Figure 4 18 shows a high level view of the MCMP architecture The data paths are established as in the TDM mode of operation via the data router Additional multichannel multipoint circuitry is activated on the MCMP circuit card The port arrangement on the MCMP circuit card is identical to the port arrangement on the TDM circuit card The first port of the MCMP circuit card is part of the communications interface between the MCMP and the DSU and emerges as a physical interface either EIA 232 D V 24 or V 35 on the DSU DATA ROUTER PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 AGGREGATE PATH FOR BASIC MODE DATA ROUTER MULTICHANNEL MULTIPOINT CIRCUITRY AGGREGATE PAT
145. a disable or enable command is received e Ifan enable command is executed to a control from the NMS or the local DCP all disabled tributaries are enabled all tributaries in test are restored to Data mode When the local DBM is disabled the DBM does not originate or answer any calls until enabled To access the Transmitter selection from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Ctil e TxCtl The Transmitter Control submenu in Local mode differs from the one in Remote mode Assume Local mode in the following discussion until directed otherwise When in Basic mode the following selections appear Change TxCtl of Ez lose DBM GS J C When in TDM or MCMP mode the following selections appear Change TxCtl of 2 DSU DBM CA Gi Select DSU for the DSU s transmitter DDS core select DBM for the DBM s transmitter the DBM s call setup and answering capability or DBM core or select Ports for one or more of the TDM or MCMP circuit card s ports For this example select Ports The following appears Port Number 1 ER S Y EXE EAS 8 gt Use the F1 or F2 key to display the port number of your choice Port number selections are 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 If the Port Speed configuration option for a port is disabled that port number will not display as a selection For
146. al command from the DCP DSU timing is taken from the DDS network 56 KBPS DDS LINE SW 56 DBM AGGREGATE DATA PATH SWITCHED 56 KBPS DIGITAL EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg 494 13934 02 Figure 4 27 Aggregate Switched Backup for Circuit Configuration 4 34 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Digital Bridge A TDM or MCMP circuit card can be configured to perform digital bridee capability This is a special case of digital sharing where all active ports on the bridee are configured to one digital sharing group with or without contention A digital bridge can be configured as a central site bridge CBrdg or an extended bridge EBrdg when more bridging capability is needed SEMIS CARRIER DIGITAL BRIDGE CROSSOVER CABLES The digital bridge capability allows for multipoint transmission from a local digital bridge Figure 4 28 as opposed to network bridging The DTE connected to the DSU having the digital bridge capability is the controlling DTE The digital bridge capability is used primarily in COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier applications providing dedicated dial backup for multipoint DDS circuits One TDM or MCMP circuit card configured as CBrdg provides bridging capability depending upon the application f TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY NN N N 7 c
147. al site DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds Figure 4 33 During dial backup remote commands are routed through the digital bridge and the DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds to the tributary DSUs or DBMs The central site bridge supports nondisruptive NonD mixed Mixed and disruptive Disr diagnostic types Diag Type The Disruptive Diagnostic Type Disr Type should be set to 3600e or Br56 for switched 56 kbps dial backup 1 1 1 V 32 DBM or SW 56 DBM m T 11 2 PORT 1 3 1 1 4 PORT V 32 DBM or SW 56 DBM ADDRESSES ARE VALID FOR ADp NMSADDRESS DATA PATH DIAGNOSTIC PATH 494 12836 04 Figure 4 32 Tributary Addressing via DDS Connections 4 40 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation FROM NMS CARRIER DTE PORT PORT 1 DTE PORT 1 1 1 1 2 V 32 DBM or SW 56 DBM DIGITAL BRIDGE 1 1 3 1 1 4 DTE PORT V 32 DBM SW 56 DBM miei T 1 NMS ADDRESS DATA PATH DIAGNOSTIC PATH 494 12837 04 Figure 4 33 Tributary Addressing via Backup Connections 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 41 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Multipoint Backup Architecture included in the digital sharing group Under these _ conditions the digital bridge is active during normal Ina central site multipoint dial backup configuration operation and valid backup calls ar
148. an be ordered from the factory with this option installed This option can be also be field installed by your Customer Support representative or upgraded by Factory Service 1 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Overview DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL PANEL WALL MOUNT AC TRANSFORMER STATUS INDICATORS TABLE TOP AC TRANSFORMER NETWORK DDS DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE DBM INTERFACE INTERFACE EIA232D N 24 INTERFACE PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 LOW VOLTAGE AC POWER IN ADDITIONAL EIA 232 INTERFACES PORT NUMBERS 2 6 496 13091 04 Figure 1 1 Model 3610 DSU with TDM or MCMP 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 1 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units SDU 2 SHARED DIAGNOSTIC A CONTROL PANEL 2 SDCP LATCHES 491 13092 STATUS INDICATORS HIGKDENSITY HIGH DENSITY DTE IRCUIT P I CONNECTOR CARD INTEREACE CONNECTOR INTERCONNECT CABLE FERRITE CHOKE 25 PIN EIA 232 V 24 INTERFACE 6 Zi 34 PIN V 35 INTERFACE 6 PORT CONNECTOR MODULE 25 PIN V 35 INTERFACE FERRITE CHOKES TDM OR DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE 493 14112 01 Figure 1 2 Model 3611 DSU with TDM or MCMP 1 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Overview DBM Types Three dial backup modules DBMs are available DBM is optional and provides an alternate
149. an be software defined to provide the TDM or digital bridge capability the MCMP option can be software defined to provide TDM MCMP or digital bridge capability However only one of these capabilities can be in effect at a time The TDM cannot be upgraded to support MCMP capability 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 1 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units LPDA 2 interoperability is provided by the systems network architecture SNA Diagnostic Interface option that is installed on the DSU circuit card It supports DSU management from IBM s NetView host based network management system NMS as well as management from a Paradyne NMS or the DSU s diagnostic control panel DCP This option also supports DBM including the DBM V DBM S and DBM D and digital bridge capability Standard Features The 3600 Series DSU without any options offers the following features e Multispeed operation e Clear Channel capability e LADS operation e Asynchronous operation Nondisruptive diagnostics e NMS control e Rate adaption e Aggregate switching e Diagnostic Control Panel control e Full tributary diagnostics e External dial backup Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide which can be ordered for a description of these features NOTE This applications guide is designed to be used in conjunction with the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Dat
150. and DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds need to be paired off and in each DBM a pointer set to the telephone number of the associated DBM V DBM S or DBM D Thus each DBM will call a different central site DBM Refer to the Configuration Branch section in Chapter 5 for further details regarding configuration options 4 46 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Tributaries with Multiple Call capability should use this capability to increase their probability of connection to the bridge The telephone numbers of all DBMs on the bridge should be entered into the tributary s directory The digital bridge must be configured for the appropriate number of ports one port for each drop to be backed up and the Bridge Rate configuration option must be set to DSU The Bridge Rate configuration option is discussed in the MUX Configuration Options section of Chapter 5 The DBMs associated with the digital bridge should have security options compatible with the tributary DBMs When a tributary DSU senses a DDS network failure condition it places a call to one of the DBMs associated with the digital bridge The call is answered by the control DBM V DBM S or DBM D the DBM raises DSR which then turns on DTR at the digital bridge port The EIA status command can be used to determine which ports are active by checking the DTR Lead status Each tributary sensing a network failure will place a backup call Automatic DDS Restorati
151. ang min 15 min 10 MultiCall Enab Disab Pin Assignments OVerVIe c stus Lade Edd dedo d daba Sa Mua Overview The pin assignments for the 3600 Series TDM and MCMP connectors and interfaces are included in this appendix Refer to them as needed Figure C 1 shows the TDM interface cable that is used for both TDM and MCMP non modular applications Table C 1 provides its connector pin assignments Figure C 2 shows the digital bridge interface cable used for non modular bridging applications Table C 2 provides its connector pin assignments Figure C 3 shows the pin locations on the 60 position high density connector of the carrier mounted non modular TDM or MCMP circuit card Table C 3 provides its connector pin assignments Tables C 4 and C 5 provide the EIA 232 D V 24 Figure C 4 shows the V 35 adapter that is used with the standalone TDM DSD MCMP DSD TDM Flex or MCMP Flex models Table C 6 provides its pin assignments Figure C 5 shows the 6 port connector module used with the modular TDM and MCMP circuit cards Table C 7 provides the EIA 232 TDM and MCMP connector pin assignments for Ports 2 through 6 for all standalone and modular DSU TDMs and DSU MCMPs Figure C 6 shows the V 35 interconnect cable used with the 6 port connector module for the modular TDM Table C 8 provides its pin assignments Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 G
152. anged from the SDCP or from an NMS that supports this feature From the SDCP To change or digital bridge configuration options from the SDCP use the selection sequence from the top level menu The Options Opts branch is used to change configuration options For additional configuration option information refer to Unit Configuration Chapter 4 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options User s Guide Supplement or Configuration Options Chapter 6 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide For a listing of SDCP messages received when a TDM or MCMP is installed refer to Appendix B of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Time Division Multiplexer Multichannel Multipoint and Digital Bridge Options User s Guide Supplement or Appendix C of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide From the NMS Software configuration options for a Model 3611 with a TDM or MCMP can also be set from a 6800 Series NMS using the Change commands These commands include the following cho followed by DSU s network address allows you to change the DSU Diagnostic DSU DBM and General General MUX Setup and Port Port Speed and LPDA configuration option sets cho followed by the DBM s net
153. ard Up to three separate groups can be selected Ports 1 and 2 Ports 3 and 4 and or Ports 5 and 6 FEP transmit data receive data and controls pass through the lower numbered port of a FEP port sharing group to be broadcast onto the aggregate data path and to the higher numbered port For example data transmitted from the FEP on Port 3 is sent to the DSU connected to Port 4 and to Channel C of the TDM Figure 4 10 Data received from Channel C or Port 4 is sent to the FEP on Port 3 FEP port sharing is also used to back up an MCMP circuit with a set of point to point TDM circuits The MCMP Backup section describes this in detail 4 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation DATA CENTER RETAIL BRANCH CARRIER DDS 56 KBPS A 19 2 KBPS TDM INTERFACE wer AGGREGATE CABLE DATA PATH CROSSOVER CABLE REMOTE ATM LOCATIONS DDS OR APL 4 8 KBPS 4 8 KBPS 4 8 KBPS C ATM 4 8 KBPS CROSSOVER CABLES ARE USED WITH MODULAR UNITS 4 8 KBPS TDM MULTIPLEXING DEMULTIPLEXING DSU TRIBUTARY 492 12846 02 Figure 4 10 FEP Port Sharing 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 15 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TDM Backup Case 1 V 32 Backup for subrate DDS Figure 4 11 If the DDS network is A point to point multiplexing circuit can be backed up out of service the network manag
154. ata Service Units During the backup session each pair of communicating DBMs the DBM V and its tributary DBM and the DDS network are active on the bridge When the DDS network is restored each tributary DSU drops its network alarm After the 5 minute restoration interval has elapsed the DSU switches back to the DDS network and the remote DTE then receives its polls from the host over the DDS network Remote DTE responses are also sent back over the DDS network this causes the control DSU to raise LSD transferring the data from the digital bridge where it goes to the host controlling DTE As each tributary disconnects its DBM its DBM V switches out of Data mode becoming inactive on the bridge Thus restoration to the DDS network is automatic and generally nondisruptive Disruptions should only occur if the control and tributary are communicating when the switch occurs Pertinent configuration options for the central site bridge and the extended bridge that support the configuration scenario just described follow The configuration options fora DBM V and a tributary DSU DBM are the same as those provided earlier in the Automatic Partial Backup section related to Figures D 3 and D 4 Please note that all DBM Vs here should be configured the same only the passwords and telephone numbers should differ The same holds true for the tributary DSU DBMs Configuration Options Set the central site bridge configuration option
155. ath The Clr selection resets the counter to 0 Tx BIk err Local and Number of blocks with errors detected at the remote DSU remote DBM indicating a fault in the outgoing transmission path The Clr selection resets the counter to 0 Rx TimOuts Local DBM only Number of blocks that were not received or acknowledged by the remote DBM The Clr selection resets the counter to 0 1 Local refers to the test initiator 5 28 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Bit Error Rate Test The Bit Error Rate Test BERT is a session disruptive test used to analyze the network circuit This test requires network connection to the control and tributary DSUs or DBMs A DTE connection to the remote DBM may be required The originating DBM sends a continuous 511 bit test pattern from its test pattern generator Figure 5 12 transmitting via the DDS circuit for the DSU test and via the dial circuit for the DBM test The test monitors the results in one of the following ways e Putting the remote DBM into Digital Loopback and checking the returned pattern for errors Figure 5 12 part A e Simultaneously executing the BERT in the remote DSU Figure 5 12 part B The test continues until aborted from the DCP or NMS This test can be run on an aggregate or per port basis When run on an aggregate basis in band secondary channel transport communications are disrupted A control DSU can initiate a Bit Error Rate Test in a point to poi
156. ation NMS control A 3600 Series DSU with TDM has the same diagnostic capabilities as a point to point 3600 Series DSU without the TDM option Control of a TDM session can be performed from the DCP or from a 6700 or 6800 Series NMS Async Terminal control A Model 3610 DSU with TDM can be controlled from a VT100 compatible async terminal When this feature is enabled the DSU is operated from the async terminal s menu and keyboard Point to point backup A 3600 Series DSU with TDM can also have a DBM installed for point to point dial backup If backup is at a different speed than the DSU s speed TDM operation automatically changes to a second predetermined port speed to support dial backup operation at the lower speed Aggregate switching Aggregate switching provides an additional mode of point to point dial backup When enabled it provides an internal aggregate data stream that includes diagnostics and framing on the alternate EIA 232 D or V 35 interface of Port 1 The aggregate port can then be connected to a DBM or an external dial backup unit External dial backup An external DBU e g 3800 Series dial lease modem can provide backup for a point to point DSU By monitoring the Data Terminal Ready DTR lead on the DTE port that supports the aggregate data path the 3600 Series DSU can set up a backup session when the external DBU receives an incoming call The DTR lead of the DSU s alternate DTE port then swit
157. automatic partial backup configuration scenario where there is an extended bridge Figure D 7 shows when dial backup is not active Figure D 8 shows when dial backup is active on all drops and Figure D 9 shows when dial backup is active on two drops is as follows e Network is a 7 drop DDS multipoint network operating at 9600 bps e Customer wishes automatic backup controlled by the tributary DSUs e The control and tributary DSUs are configured for mixed diagnostics e Seven central site DBM Vs are dedicated to the control DSU and are connected to its digital bridge e Host requires a switched LSD signal e Tributary DBMs are configured for 9 6 kbps operation LSD emulation V 13 switched carrier emulation automatic backup no fallback backup on network fault or LSD Off time out period of 1 minute outgoing call setup with password security and automatic restoration of DDS after 5 minutes e Central site DBM Vs are configured for 9 6 kbps operation no fallback LSD V 13 emulation and auto answer with password security e Digital bridge consists of a central site bridge and an extended bridge working in tandem The central site bridge has Bridge Rate set to DSU has Ports DCE first port of the digital bridge through Prt6 active and configured for contention and takes its timing from the DDS system clock The extended bridge has Bridge Rate set to 9 6 has Ports 2 through 4 active and configured for contention
158. ave been acquired Directory The DSU s dial backup Directory Dir is available only if a DBM is installed and only from the Local branch It can store up to 10 dial strings so the DBM V DBM S or DBM D can call other DBMs modems Each entry consists of a telephone number and may include other information such as a callback directory pointer and comment field A Backup Directory telephone number or dial string can contain any of the characters listed in Table 5 12 Refer to COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Options Applications Guide to learn how to access this subbranch and for examples showing how to enter a dial string to change it to clear it and to copy one directory entry into another Remember that a dial string can be up to 36 characters and cannot contain any separating characters or spaces 1 555 1234 or 555 1234 Other valid characters can be interspersed t p w and comma The Undo selection restores or erases the dial string Entering an underscore _ to the immediate right of the last character ends the field After a directory entry has been entered or changed save the entry CAUTION Do not use Save until after you have loaded the directory entry displayed and if necessary edited the directory entry Saving before a directory entry is loaded overwrites the current directory entry with random
159. backup D 6 IID 7 D 15 active D 16 D 17 extended bridge backup aggregate switched MCMP circuits 4 34 TDM circuit 4 20 automatic partial D 6 extended bridge branch 5 7 5 12 menu selections 5 13 channels 4 29 complete channel 4 30 H 31 connections dedicated MCMP D 27 dial ED puting 6 multip oint 4 56 external D 30 full 1 544 31 D 8 dial backup active D 20 not active D 21 extended bridge D 19 MCMP 425 switched 56 DBM multipoint addressing 4 40 architecture NetView initiated 4 55 nondisruptive diagnostics D 10 D 11 partial 1 544 30 1 42 H 43 multipoint point to point switched 56 4 19 switched 56 kbps D 4 TDM 4 16 three channels 4 32 V 32 extended circuits high speed 0504 17 subrate DDS 4 16 bandwidth overhead 4 23 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 Index 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units basic mode 4 4 digital test 5 26 BERT bit error rate test dual TDM MCMP remote loopback TDM MCMPI5 30 bilateral loopback 5 5 bit error rate test TDM MCMP 5 30 branch backup DBM DBM V DBM S DBM D menu selections 5 13 bridge E capability maximum mode 4 4 4 bridged Popes architecture 4 51 operation 4 50 broadcast data digital digital bridge 4 37 transmission Al
160. ble or digital bridge interface cable is used to complete the communication path Data broadcast to a digital bridge port is accepted by the central site DSU and then transmitted over the 4 wire connection through the tributary DSU to its associated DTE When a tributary DTE turns on RTS to transmit data the tributary DSU begins sending data over the 4 wire transmission facility causing the central site DSU to turn on LSD The cabling cross couples LSD to RTS on the bridge port NMS Control For a DSU with TDM or MCMP the DATAPHONE II System Controller cannot configure the TDM ports or set port speeds Only the COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS can fully support TDM digital bridge and MCMP capabilities Since NMS supports DSUs DBM Vs DBM Ss and DBM Ds network management control of a multipoint dial backup session can be provided by sending tests and status commands to the individual DSU and backup devices Additional network management based features can be accomplished such as determining which drops require backup controlling the dial backup setup for the tributary locations verifying that all drops have been backed up successfully and filtering out redundant alarm information User defined routines can automate network management controlled backup for 3600 Series multipoint networks These routines can be requested from the NMS console or can be linked to an event driven routine and triggered by a Facility Alarm FA ge
161. blications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners 25 Printed paper COPYRIGHT 1999 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system ortranslated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A March 1999 3610
162. ch may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vi
163. ches the data path Using another method the local 3600 Series DSU can initiate and terminate a backup call by controlling the DTR lead of the external DBU by controlling the Data Set Ready DSR lead 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 1 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DSU with MCMP Capability The capability is an enhancement and allows up to six independent application programs to share one standard 56 kbps multipoint facility Only an MCMP be configured to provide MCMP capability and provides the following features e Channel capacity The channel capacity is six channels which can be assigned to any of the physical ports One port is provided on the DSU and one 2 port version or five EIA 232 ports are provided on the MCMP circuit card Up to six virtual multipoint circuits can exist over one standard DDS multipoint facility There are two versions of the Model 3610 MCMPF Hlex the 2 port MCMP Flex and the 6 port With one of these features installed each port can be set as either EIA 232 or V 35 interface When a port other than Port 1 is used for V 35 operation a cable adapter is required feature number 3000 F1 510 When a Model 3610 MCMP DSD an MCMP that can operate as a digital sharing device is ordered Ports 2 through 6 are configured for EIA 232 operation You can select either 232 or V 35 operation for this port group Number of addres
164. cinity of the leak 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 B COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THE DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRES NT APPAREIL NUM RIQUE N MET PAS DE BRUITS RADIO LECTRIQUES D PASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUM RIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LE R GLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIO LECTRIQUE DICT PAR LE MINIS
165. ctivate the bridge Enter originate in the Standby Facility State field and send the Standby Facility sf command to the control DSU Alternatively the control DSU can be accessed by using a Bkup command to the DSU from the SDCP Upon receiving the command the control DSU activates the digital bridge and switches to bridge timing Brdg Timing at the Bridge Rate fallback speed The Bridge Rate configuration option is discussed in the MUX Configuration Options section of Chapter 5 The 6800 Series NMS must send a dial command to each of the DBM Vs associated with the digital bridge causing each DBM V to first place a call to its respective tributary DBM then switch from Standby to Backup mode using the Dial Mode dm command Alternatively the same function can be accomplished by the Bkup command to each DBM V from the SDCP Each DBM V establishes a call with a DBM the pair of DBMs handshake and perform security checks if so configured and go into Dial Backup mode Manual DDS Restoration For a full dial backup session use the 6800 Series NMS to restore the control and tributary DSUs to the DDS network and drop all dial backup calls Enter release in the Standby Facility State field and send the Standby Facility sf command to have the control DSU switch the data path from the bridge to the DSU Use the dial command and enter q in the Number to Dial field to have each DBM V associated with the digital bridge command the trib
166. cuit if analog takes timing from the DDS network therefore the extended control modem is configured for external timing from the local DSU and received timing at the extended tributary modem The tributary DSU is configured for DDS timing and elastic store on Port 1 Elastic store compensates for phase differences between the DDS network timing and the received timing of the analog modem All configuration options such as elastic store and external DDS timing are discussed in detail in Chapter 5 Diagnostic Path Extension Diagnostic control can be extended to other data communications equipment DCE beyond the tributary DSU The diagnostic channel DC provides an external 1200 bps asynchronous transparent path for a network management system s control channel to extend diagnostic control to other Paradyne devices at the remote location Digital Sharing Digital sharing is a TDM or MCMP feature that allows up to six ports to share the same channel Typically this is used for terminal to host connections that allow one host port to service several terminal ports Digital sharing can be used on either point to point or multidrop circuits as shown in Figure 4 8 This connection is used where multiple terminal devices are to be attached to a single communications channel The terminal devices are typically addressed by the host computer the protocol ensures that only one terminal device transmits at a time In single port
167. d 56 kbps and public switched telephone or dial networks or to a local area data set also called a limited distance modem refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide DSU DTE Connection Make the DTE connection as described in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide In a TDM or MCMP application only DSU Port 1 is capable of interfacing to an EIA 232 connector or a V 35 connector In a DSD application an option card allows all ports to operate as either EIA 232 or V 35 interfaces In a Flex application where the DSU firmware version is less than 6 3x a Flex interface switch allows all ports to operate as either ELA 232 or an 35 interface Ports 2 through 6 have only EIA 232 connectors If speeds higher than 19 2 kbps are selected for these ports an Paradyne special cable provides an interface between the MCMP s D type connector and the DTE cable s V 35 connector 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Verification Testing Perform verification testing after any installation After installing and configuring a network including control and tributary DSUs the DDS network and if appropriate DBMs and their dial connections perform the following series of tests from the control DSU using
168. d and originate in the Standby Facility State field to the DBM This completes the backup circuit and the host computer can restart the network polling the FEP line may need to be restarted During backup the DSU still reports the facility alarm to the NMS When the failure is corrected and the DDS network is restored the alarm is turned Off at the workstation s Alarm Monitor window You can issue an aggregate Digital Test to one of the tributary DSUs to ensure that the DDS network is working correctly 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units To end the backup session via the NMS issue disconnect commands to the control DSU and all its DBM Ss The NMS restores all control and tributary DSUs to the DDS network and drops all dial backup calls by issuing an sf command and release in the Standby Facility State field to the control DSU and an sf command and release in the Standby Facility State field command followed by a dial and a q command in the Number to Dial field to each DBM associated with the digital bridge 7o end the backup session via the SDCP address the control DSU and each DBM by issuing the DrBu drop backup command Ending the backup session causes the control DSU to deactivate the bridge and DSU timing 56 kbps becomes the DDS clock source once again Each DBM S signals its tributary that it is dropping the call and hangs up Each tributary then switches back to the DDS ne
169. d from the replaced the unit does not have DSU s rear panel labeled POWER to be turned upside down to open the case 2 Disconnect the DDS interface cable labeled LINE from the DSU 3 Disconnect the DBM and NMS interface cables 6 With the unit upside down use a small flat head labeled BACKUP and CC DC respectively if screwdriver to release the four snap tabs holding installed the base in place refer to Figure 2 3 4 Disconnect the EIA 232 D V 24 or V 35 interface 7 Turn the unit over while being careful not to allow cable from the DSU any cable to be pulled free of the connectors EIA 232 D V 24 INTERFACE POWER CORD is POWER h DBM JACK BACKUP DDS JACK LINE d AC TRANSFORMER 494 14517 Figure 2 8 Disconnecting the DSU 2 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation Removing the DSU from Its Base Refer to Figure 2 4 as you follow these steps If replacing or refer to this figure as you remove the current TDM or MCMP p Procedure l Disconnect the keypad flat cable from the DSU by squeezing the small black latches on each side of the cable and carefully lifting the cable up and out of the connection Disconnect the LCD flat cable from the DSU circuit card Gently work the cable not the connector out from the connector Be careful not to bend any of the cable pins If a or MCMB is being replaced disconnect the TDM or MCMP flat cable s p
170. data path in case the digital connection fails Each of the three DBM types listed below occupy one slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier DBM V DBM V is used for point to point dial backup and provides multipoint dial backup with a digital bridge The DBM V provides a carrier mounted 14 4 kbps V 32bis module that is compatible with the DBM associated with 3600 Series DSUs and with a COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS DBM S A DBM S provides the capability to utilize the 4 wire switched 56 kbps digital service to back up a failed multipoint DDS circuit via a digital bridge It is particularly useful in an MCMP backup environment The DBM S can be used on switching services that are compatible with AT amp T MCI and US SPRINT using dedicated 4 wire access DBM D A DBM D provides the capability to utilize the 2 wire switched 56 kbps digital service to back up a failed multipoint DDS circuit via a digital bridge It is particularly useful in an MCMP backup environment The DBM D can be used on switching services that are compatible with Northern Telecom s DataPath service using dedicated 2 wire access NOTE References to DBM operation in this guide also apply to a DBM V DBM S or DBM D Government Requirements For the Government Requirements and specific instructions pertaining to connection to the telephone network refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User
171. del 3611 carrier mounted DSU TDM or DSU MCMP or to add a TDM or MCMP to your DSU Chapter 4 familiarizes you with the basic principles underlying TDM MCMP and digital bridge operation It also explains how SNA Diagnostic Interface operation is affected when using these features Chapter 5 identifies and discusses how the DSU functions differently or has different selections available when the TDM or MCMP is installed or when a DBM V DBM S or DBM D is installed Appendix provides a summary of the DSU s menu structure Refer to the menu tree as you proceed through the menu via the DCP or SDCP if you have a Model 3611 DSU Appendix B provides a summary of all of the configuration options in the form of Configuration Worksheets along with a suggestion for how the worksheets can be used Appendix C provides pin assignments for TDM or MCMP interfaces and cables Appendix D shows typical system configurations utilizing and digital bridging These configurations also indicate the configuration options that should be set to duplicate these scenarios for your own applications Index 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 vii COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Related Documents Basic DSU product documentation includes the following 3610 A2 GB46 3610 A2 GB48 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models
172. del 3611 DSU Pin Ports 2 6 Circuit Name Function 2 3 4 5 6 EIA 232 CCITT 14 41 32 20 57 BA 103 Transmit Data TXD 49 13 35 43 28 BB 104 Received Data RXD 19 9 33 23 58 CA 105 Request to Send RTS 48 1 34 51 56 CB 106 Clear to Send CTS 46 4 42 50 26 CC 107 Data Set Ready DSR 8 18 30 12 24 AB 102 Signal Ground SG 11 3 10 21 25 CF 109 Received Line Signal Detect LSD 223 53 373 153 293 112 Data Signal Rate Selector DCE Source 45 40 36 44 55 DB 114 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DCE Source 47 2 31 52 27 DD 115 Receiver Signal Element Timing DCE Source 16 7 39 54 59 CD 108 2 Data Terminal Ready DTR 17 6 38 53 60 DA 113 Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source 1 The 60 pin high density connector provides five EIA 232 interfaces Connector pin locations are shown in Figure C 3 2 232 refers to EIA 232 D without the loopbacks and ring indicator 3 n TDM mode if External Lead is configured for Rate Ext Leads Rate then this lead is used for speed selection on a port connecting to an analog private line APL extended circuit when the DDS backbone goes into backup This pin signals the APL modem to fall back to the predetermined backup speed if the APL modem has fallback capability 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Table C 4 EIA 232 D V 24 Connector Port 1 Circuit Name
173. diagnostic rate that can be run for various asynchronous to synchronous configurations Note that in this table None indicates that no excess bandwidth is available for nondisruptive diagnostics When the DSU is configured for nondisruptive diagnostics and the AsyncSync configuration option is enabled the DTE rate cannot operate underspeed for diagnostics since the DTE is now operating in synchronous mode In addition the maximum diagnostic rate available is 1600 bps but the DSU s firmware overrides any selected rate with a speed up to 2400 bps if more bandwidth is required for diagnostics Asynchronous port speeds of 150 300 600 and 1800 bps may be obtained by oversampling oversampling must be used to obtain these port rates To oversample the Async Sync configuration option must be disabled and the synchronous port rate must be set to a rate greater than or equal to four times the asynchronous DTE rate For example select 1 2 kbps for the synchronous port speed if the asynchronous port speed is 150 or 300 bps select 2 4 kbps if it is 600 bps and 7 2 bps if it is 1800 bps This ensures that oversampling will take place DSU TRIBUTARY Share DevA Enab DSU Ports 1 3 Async Sync Enab Async Rate Sync PrtSp 9 6 11 2 494 14320 01 Figure 4 4 Single Port Point to Point Circuit with Nondisruptive Diagnostics 4 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation M
174. ding to 5 40 3610 A2 GB41 60 Index port bridee maximum capability 4 36 capacity 1 2 configuration options 5 38 connector high density mode 13611 9 option se 537 single async sync support 4 8 point to point circuit nondisruptive dia enostics 4 8 speed 1 3 configuration op tions 5 39 pi power terminal power up DSU routine 2 8 3 8 remote digital loopback menu subbranches 5 7 removing TDM MCMP model 3611 B 13 report terminal power requirements government DDS automatic manual SDCP menu tree configuration options 5 36 option set signal flow 4 7 4 24 H 51 single DTE port async sync 4 8 point to point async sync 4 8 SNA diagnostic interface 1 6 53 software configuration DCP or NMS SDCP 3 4 speeds channel characteristics 4 6 line standard features 1 2 status branch 5 8 codes DTE 1 4 5 10 indicators 5 3 DBM V DBM S DBM D 5 e DSU TDM MCMP 5 6 5 5 1 subnetwork health and status 5 10 switch aggregate flex interface switch locations model 36102 3 model3611 3 modular TDM MCMP switched 56 DBM 4 19 dedicated 4 28 dedicated MCMP D 27 carrier emulation 1 4 4 25 LSD operation synchronous sources 4 6 51 applications architecture assembling disassembling 2 5 backbone circuit wi
175. dividual channel that Const indicate transitions of RTS at the remote TDM or MCMP port receiving DSU toggles LSD as appropriate PCC Buffer Enable a buffer to intercept the PCC code X X Ignored on an individual channel so it is not received by the receiving DTE Elast Stor Enable the elastic store buffer 16 bit X X X register for the port RTS CTS Del For the port select additional delay X X X between the time RTS turns ON and CTS is turned ON DTR Alarm Enable the DSU to report a major alarm for X X X the port if the port s DTR lead goes Off AntiStream Specify if the port is to be monitored for X X X streaming terminal alarms 1 For MCMP mode the values for configuration options Async Sync Async Rate Async Bit Char and Stop Bits are set at the control DSU and loaded into each tributary DSU when the Acquire Poll List Acq command is issued from the control DSU s DCP Refer to the MCMP Operation section of Chapter 4 and the Poll List section of this chapter 5 38 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Table 5 10 2 of 2 Complete List of MUX Port Configuration Options Option Function Mode of Function DSR FrcOn Enable port DSR lead to remain ON as X X X long as the DSU is working regardless of tests and network alarms DSR on Tst Specify when the port DSR lead is turned X X Forced Off ON or Off during testing Extend Chan Specify whether an extended network has X X X main channel co
176. dule DBM so if your application uses DBM V DBM S or DBM D refer to the other applications guide Order the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide for the technical specifications for the DSU and all of its options basic DSU installation and operation information verification of network operation all configuration options tables and worksheets DCP messages for all options and troubleshooting flowcharts DATAPHONES II and Diagnostic Microcomputer DMC Network Management System NMS references are also provided along with a complete equipment list and glossary Order the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide if your application uses these options as part of its configuration or if your application uses DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds It also provides a NetView commands reference for your convenience How to Use this Guide Chapter 1 gives a general overview of the features for the 3600 Series DSU and its TDM and MCMP options Refer to this chapter for a summary of feature capability Chapter 2 explains how to install and set up a Model 3610 standalone DSU TDM Flex or DSU MCMP Flex or if you have added a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex to your DSU If you ordered a TDM DSD or MCMP DSD refer to this chapter to change interface settings Chapter 3 explains how to install and set up a Mo
177. e RPower CCN by EL Enab Disab SW Vers 3 22 4 41 Normal ChgMd Options Values AnswExtBU Enab Disab Mode DPII ADP DSU Options Value Rate Kpbs 64CC 64L 56 38 4 19 2 9 6 4 8 2 4 TxClkSource Int RXC DDS Prt1 Msg Clamp Enab Disab TxElasStor Enab Disab Diagnostic DSU m RxElastStor Enab Disab Options 19 2 PowrLvl 6 0 10 Diag NonD Disr Mixed None 64KScrambling 2 Ch bps 100 400 800 1200 1600 64KLatchLpbk On Off Disr Type 2500 2600 3600s 3600e Br56 AggrSwitch Enab Disab AgSw Timing Int Aggr Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 V 54 Lpbk Enab Disab TDM option only Configuration Worksheet for Basic Mode Date Location Local Phone No Device Local Address DBM Installed Serial No Tributary Network Address SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 Installed DSU Options Value Diagnostic DSU Options Value DBM Options Value Rate Kbps 64CC 64L 56 38 4 19 2 9 6 4 8 2 4 Diag Type NonD Disr Mixed None Rate Kbps t 14 4 12 0 9 6 4 8 2 4 PrtSp Kbps 64 56 48 38 4 32 2
178. e 4 14 The Switched 56 DDS circuit is operating at less than 56 kbps rate DBM provides full backup of point to point single adaption is used to match the DDS speed 6800 SERIES NMS psu DBM CARRIER PORT pat sp PRT SP DDS 56000 BPS SW 56 DBM 56000 BPS HOST SWITCHED 56 KBPS NETWORK psu PORT 5 2 3 494 13938 01 Figure 4 14 Case 4 Switched 56 DBM Backup for DSU Operating at 56 kbps or Less 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 19 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Case 5 Aggregate Switched Backup for Circuits Figure 4 15 point to point circuit can be backed up using the aggregate switch capability of the DSU This may be useful if the DBMs are shared via an external switch In this example the control DSU should be configured so that AggrSwitch Aggregate Switch is enabled and AgSw Timing Aggregate Switch Timing is set to Aggr The DBM S connected to the aggregate switch port must have Diag Type Diagnostic Type set to None or Disr The DSU will take its timing from the Switched 56 DBM when in Dial Backup mode The DBM S should be commanded to dial the remote DBM using the Dial command and to activate the data over the backup line using the switch to Dial Dial command The DSU should then be commanded to switch data to the backup port using the Backup
179. e 6 port connector module is a 25 pin connector that provides the EIA 232 DTE interface port connectors are individual with this type of unit and a separate crossover cable is required for each connector that 1s attached to a DBM V DBM S or DBM D In addition to the six ports on the 6 port connector module a 26 pin high density D type connector is located at the top of the connector module to provide a V 35 interface for either Port 1 or an aggregate data path To use the V 35 interface the 6 port V 35 Interconnect Cable feature number 3600 F3 500 part number 035 0174 0031 is required The cable provides an interface between the high density D type connector and a DTE cable s V 35 connector Appendix C shows the 6 port connector module and provides the port pin assignments Cables must be ordered separately DBM Vs DBM Ss DBM Ds DBM Vs DBM Ss and DBM Ds are dial backup units that are used for multipoint dial backup Each DBM V DBM S or DBM D occupies a slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and is connected to a TDM or MCMP circuit card through cables Up to five DBM Vs DBM Ss or DBM Ds can be connected to a DSU TDM or DSU MCMP or MCMP option is configured to operate as a digital bridge the digital bridge and its DBMS are dedicated to a single DSU within the carrier Typical configurations for various applications can be found in the Digital Bridge DBM V DBM S DBM D Interface section of Chapter 4
180. e Control Ctrl branch select LEDs and reassign the LEDs from the aggregate data path Aggr to one of the DSU ports Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 etc MCMP capability is now functional with all tributary DSUs on the control DSU s MCMP poll list At this point DSU ports can be assigned to MCMP channels through the Port Speed PrtSp selection from the Configuration Options Opts submenus Adding a TDM or MCMP to an Installed Model 3611 DSU This section describes the installation procedure for adding the TDM or MCMP option onto the Model 3611 DSU and then installing itin a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A non modular TDM feature number 3600 F3 206 or non modular MCMP feature number 3600 F3 207 may be added to a modular or non modular DSU A modular TDM feature number 3600 F3 204 or modular MCMP feature number 3600 F3 205 must be used with the Modular 3611 DSU The TDM or MCMP circuit card must be physically and electrically connected to the DSU requiring two adjacent slots in the carrier The DSU hardware switches are not changed when the TDM or MCMP option is installed The switches on the non modular TDM or MCMP circuit card are shown in Figure 3 1 the switches on the modular TDM or MCMP circuit card are shown in Figure 3 2 These switches should not be changed they are for factory test purposes only Refer to the appropriate section to install either the non modular or modular or Before installing
181. e FEP port sharing feature three channels each tributary via the FEP port sharing feature from the control DSU MCMP can be daisy chained Figure 4 25 In this case each tributary DSU to to a set of DSU DBM TDM units to provide dial be backed up must be equipped with a DBM and backup for each tributary DSU To daisy chain the MCMP Backup configuration option should be these units alternate TDM and digital bridge set to TDM At the central site DSU DBM TDM interface cables for non modular devices and use or DSU DBM MCMP unit operating in TDM mode crossover cables with modular devices Essentially must be available for each tributary to be backed the backup becomes the dial backup of a set of up point to point TDM circuits PSTN 14 4 KBPS CARRIER DSU DBM PORT PRT sP PRT SP 1 9 6 9 6 DSU DBM PORT PRT sP PRT SP DSU DBM PORT PRT sP PRT SP PSTN 14 4 KBPS CROSSOVER CABLES PSTN 14 4 KBPS DSU DBM PORT pat sP PRT SP 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 TDM AND DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLES ARE USED WITH NON MODULAR UNITS 492 13005 01 Figure 4 25 Case 4 Backing Up Up to Three Channels via the FEP Port Sharing Feature 4 32 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation There are several restrictions to implementation There can be at most three DTE inputs channels The sum of the channel speeds should be less than the DBM speed The ports that are c
182. e automatically put during partial backup configuration option Bridge Rate is onto the digital bridge Figure 4 34 set to DSU the first port of the digital bridge is CARRIER CONTROLLING POHT 1 DTE TRIBUTARY DTE AGGREGATE DATA PATH TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE DIGITAL BRIDGE BRIDGE RATE DSU 494 12854 02 Figure 4 34 Central Site Bridging Architecture 9 6 kbps Normal Operation with Partial Backup Possible 4 42 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Data from the controlling DTE is broadcast to all ports in the digital sharing group including the first port of the digital bridge where data is then directed through the DSU to the DDS line When no dial backup is in effect Figure 4 34 the DDS core connected to the bridge is the only active port When partial backup is in effect and some tributaries are still receiving data from the DDS line Figure 4 35 incoming data from the DDS line is merged with incoming data from tributaries communicating with the bridge via DBM V DBM S or DBM D and backup NOTE In multipoint dial backup the DBM Vs are configured for external timing and the tributary DBMs are configured for received timing Central site bridge timing Brdg Timing is set to Int A DBM S or DBM D is automatically set for network timing For switched 56 kbps dial backup the central site Bridge Timing Brdg Timing connections config
183. e implemented by reducing the data rate of one of the channels This channel is called the underspeed channel The underspeed channel runs 10 bits per second less than the channel s set speed For example a channel set to 9600 bps and running at underspeed operates at 9590 bps In band framing cannot be taken from a channel supporting asynchronous communication This restriction requires that if all ports are assigned to asynchronous operation the sum of the port speeds must be less than the DDS line speed If nondisruptive diagnostics are enabled and the combined data rate is equal to the DDS line speed then the underspeed port runs at the configured port speed minus the in band secondary channel transport speed For example if a secondary channel speed is set to 400 bps the port speed is set to 9600 bps and the port is configured for Underspeed the port speed will automatically run at 9200 bps The framing bits are included as part of the secondary channel bandwidth 4 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation TDM Architecture Figure 4 3 shows a high level view of the TDM architecture Port 1 on the DSU is routed to the or MCMP where it is multiplexed with Ports 2 through 6 The aggregate data path of the multiplexer is routed back to the DDS core by the data router The data router is a sophisticated circuit switch in the DSU that is capable of connecting several communication interfaces in a
184. ed from configured for MCMP mode The mode of operation can the Local branch be changed to disable the TDM or MCMP circuit card or to configure it to operate as a digital bridge e The Test branch provides extensive testing capabilities for the DSU the DDS circuit the Use the Configuration Confg branch of the menu tree DBM and the backup circuit if there is a backup to change these settings and customize the DSU TDM s call in progress This branch also provides test DSU MCMP s configuration capability for TDM or MCMP circuitry and the additional ports Menus and Mode of Operation A DSU not equipped with a TDM or MCMP is always NOTE operating in Basic mode whereas a DSU equipped with a If the Test branch does not TDM or MCMP can operate in one of several modes The appear the DSU is in Display mode of operation affects the menus that appear as well mode values can be read but not as the selections that are available within the menus changed Only authorized persons can change configuration option values for the DSU Contact your System Administrator for further For a DSU TDM the following selections are available through the MUX path of the Configuration branch TDM CBrdg central site bridge EBrdg extended bridge and None For a DSU MCMP the following information selections are available TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg and None Selecting None disables the TDM or MCMP circuit card the unit operates a
185. ed that all tributaries have Release 2 4 or greater firmware which provides the following features e Multiple Call MultiCall configuration option If the DBM is triggered by the DSU to attempt backup the DBM calls the first number in its Backup Directory If that number is busy after three attempts the DBM places a call to the second number in the directory The DBM steps through all 10 entries in the Backup Directory an attempt to place the call skipping all blank entries This configuration option gives the tributaries more flexibility and a better success rate when calling the bridge V 13 Signaling V 13 Signl configuration option for switched LSD emulation Automatic restoration e All the DBM features available under the earlier release With the earlier release multiple call and automatic restoration capabilities were not available Release 4 25 is required for 14 4 kbps and 56 kbps backup speeds via 4 wire access and release 6 18 is required for 56 kbps backup speeds via 2 wire access Setup DSU Rate Equals DBM Rate For a network where the DSU rate equals the DBM rate partial or full backup can be accomplished automatically by the tributary DSU DBM when they detect network failures Each tributary DSU should be configured for automatic backup and the Backup Directory of its associated DBM should contain the telephone number of a central site DBM associated with the digital bridge The DBMs
186. efault settings for MCMP mode Pertinent configuration options for the control and tributary DSU MCMPs and a DSU DBM supporting this application are provided 56000 BPS A 7200 BPS 14400 BPS B 4800 BPS A 7200 BPS 14400 BPS B 4800 BPS 494 13939a Figure D 15 MCMP FEP Port Sharing Configuration Dial Backup Active 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 31 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Prt2 and Prt4 Prt6 N A AsyncSync Disab for control N A for tributary TxCarrSel Const for control N A for tributary RxCarrSel Const for control N A for tributary Elast Stor Disab for control N A for tributary PrtSp DBM 1 for control 7 2 for tributary Prt2 N A for control Disab for tributary Prt3 N A for control 4 8 for tributary Prt4 through Prt6 N A for control Disab for tributary PrtSp Chan Prtl Prt2 A for control None for tributary Prt3 B Prt4 B for control None for tributary Prt5 Prt6 None DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 for control and tributary Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl for control Trib for tributary LinkConfig M Pt DBM Rate Kbps N A for control 14 4 for tributary TxClkSource N A for control RXC for tributary CarrLossDisc N A for control Yes for tributary Auto Retrain N A for control Yes for tributary Single Rate N A for control Yes for t
187. egate Digital Test to one of the tributary DSUs to ensure that the DDS network is working correctly To end the backup session via the NMS issue disconnect commands to the control DSU and all its DBM Ss The NMS restores all control and tributary DSUs to the DDS network and drops all dial backup calls by issuing an sf command and entering release in the Standby Facility State field to the control DSU and an sf command and entering release in the Standby Facility State field command followed by a dial and a q command in the Number to Dial field to each DBM S associated with the digital bridge 70 end the backup session via the SDCP address the control DSU and each DBM by issuing the DrBU drop backup command Ending the backup session causes the control DSU to deactivate the bridge and DSU timing 56 kbps becomes the DDS clock source once again Each DBM S signals its tributary that it is dropping the call and hangs up Each tributary then switches back to the DDS network and the DDS network is again functional Between the time that the bridge is deactivated and the DDS network is reestablished errors occur on those tributaries still in backup Pertinent configuration options for the central site bridge the extended bridge a DBM S and a tributary DSU DBM supporting this application follow Please note that all DBM Ss here should be configured the same only the passwords and telephone numbers should differ The same holds t
188. els 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide Status Branch The Status Stat branch reports on the health and status of the DSU and DBM the DTE interface the quality of the PSTN connection the identity of the DSU model number serial number etc and the terminal s power It checks the presence of voltage on the DTE s RTS lead Port 1 For a DSU with TDM or MCMP the health and status of the TDM or MCMP is integrated into the health and status of the DSU Of the five Status branch selections shown below CircQ Circuit Quality only appears when a V 32 DBM is installed TOP LEVEL MENU HS DTE ID TPwr Port Select Devic Expan Subn 492 12970 01 5 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Health and Status Health and Status H S enables you to display the status of the DSU as well as a DBM or if installed It automatically scans for DSU and line conditions that are not within normal limits There are three types of Health and Status reports e Devic Device Health and Status displays the health and status for a local or remote DSU and DBM and if installed Expanded Health and Status only appears during automatic dialing retrieving the local DSU s health and status information when there is a failed dialing attempt or an unsolicited disconnect after a successful connection e Subn Subnetwork Health and Status disp
189. ement system can through the switched telephone network There are five initiate dial backup or if configured for automatic possible configurations dial backup the control or tributary DSU can initiate dial backup Once the link is re established the TDM circuitry resynchronizes and data transmission resumes at the same rate as the DDS circuit In the example below the DSU TDM is running disruptive diagnostics with four ports operating at 2400 bps CARRIER DDS 9600 BPS 2390 BPS 2390 BPS 2400 BPS 2400 5 PSTN 9600 BPS CARRIER DDS 9600 BPS DSU 2390 BPS BPS TDM 492 12994 01 2390 BPS 2400 BPS Figure 4 11 Case 1 V 32 Backup for Subrate DDS 4 16 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation e Case 2 V 32 Backup for high speed DSU One possible configuration is to allow one port to Figure 4 12 The DBM port speeds must be remain at 9600 bps reconfigure one port to reconfigured so that their sum is less than or equal 4800 bps running at underspeed and reconfigure all to 14 4 kbps the PSTN line speed When the sum other ports to Off equals the line speed now 14 4 kbps one of the synchronous ports must be configured for underspeed An alternate configuration that retains all ports is to configure two ports at 2400 bps and two ports at 4800 bps with one of the ports set to Underspeed The backup port speeds can be reallocated to match your circuit
190. ently On the non modular TDM or MCMP circuit card there are hardware jumper straps that are for factory testing only Figure 3 1 On the TDM circuit card the jumpers labeled P1 and P2 are set on the MCMP circuit card jumpers labeled P1 through P5 are set These straps must not be changed They should remain in the positions shown in Figure 3 1 The switches on the modular TDM or MCMP circuit cards are shown in Figure 3 2 but they should remain in the ON position They are for factory test purposes only Most straps for the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP are set as configuration options JUMPERS P3 P4 AND P5 ONLY APPEAR ON THE MCMP CIRCUIT CARDS 393 129688 02 Figure 3 1 Non Modular TDM MCMP Circuit Card Switch Locations 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units MUST BE IN THE ON POSITION sof lt s FACEPLATE N MUST BE IN REAR THE ON POSITION SWITCH 1 ONLY APPEARS ON THE MCMP CIRCUIT CARDS 494 12966b Figure 3 2 Modular TDM MCMP Circuit Card Switch Locations Software Configuration A default software configuration is loaded in the DSU at the factory If the TDM option is installed the Model 3611 DSU is configured as a control with TDM mode enabled and Port 1 set to operate at 9 6 kbps If the MCMP option is installed the DSU is configured as a control with MCMP mode enabled and Port 1 set to operate at 9 6 kbps Software configurations can be ch
191. equipped with both DBM and TDM or perform a Digital Test on each of the TDM or MCMP ports in Dial Backup mode on the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit 4 Drop the backup For a DSU equipped with MCMP p Procedure 1 From the control DSU go to the Control Ctrl branch select LEDs and then select Aggregate Aggr to monitor the aggregate 56 kbps digital signal 2 Goto the Configuration Confg branch and select Poll List PList from the menu 3 Acquire the poll list Acq This command starts the initialization process 4 Verify that each tributary DSU with MCMP has been acquired by displaying Displ the MCMP poll list If the DSU s address does not appear on the list verify that the missing tributary DSU is equipped with the MCMP option and configured for MCMP mode After the poll list has been acquired the LSD and RXD light emitting diodes LEDs should be flashing without a pause at the control DSU s DCP Any pause indicates that a tributary on the poll list is not responding 5 From the tributary DSU if a new drop is being added to an existing MCMP circuit select Add from the Poll List menu This places the tributary DSU on the control DSU s poll list 6 After the tributary DSUs have been added to the control DSU s poll list go back to the Control Ctrl branch select LEDs and reassign the LEDs from the aggregate data path Aggr to one of the DSU ports Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 etc MC
192. eserved To access Digital Loopback from the top level menu make the following selections Local Remot F2 and Address e Test DSU or DBM select active core e Lpbk DL Port Select when not operating in single port mode NOTE When the local DSU initiates Digital Loopback to a remote DSU via Remote mode the remote DSU is placed in Test mode The local DSU is not in Test mode and another test such as BERT can be initiated at the local DSU For TDM or MCMP mode the following additional menu appears Port Number A Pri Prt2 CA Prt Prts Prt6 Aggr In Bridge mode you are not asked to select a port you are placed in the same loopback configuration as Basic mode For MCMP mode Digital Loopback using the Aggr selection is not a valid command Results The TXD RXD and RTS LED indicators show the states of the leads at the DTE interface DSU Digital Lpbk A Command Complete A Le LeJ L5 gt 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 21 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Remote Digital Loopback Remote Digital Loopback RL is typically used to support testing by an external device such as a protocol analyzer connected to the local DSU s DTE interface A test message from the external device is looped back from the receiver to the transmitter in the remote DSU and returned to the local DSU Figure 5 8 In
193. ess During the initialization process the control DSU with MCMP performs the following tasks e Determines which tributaries are present on the network e Determines the roundtrip delay to each tributary Loads the Channel Speed and Asynchronous configuration options into each tributary CAUTION The initialization process is typically performed in less than 8 seconds and is disruptive to customer data In response to the Acquire Poll List command the control DSU with MCMP broadcasts a query message on the network asking what tributaries are to be on the poll list active tributary DSUs on the network respond by sending an affirmation message to the control DSU and the control DSU adds those tributaries to the poll list The following configuration options are loaded into each tributary from the control DSU during initialization Channel Speed Async Sync e Async Rate e Async Bits Character e Stop Bits During MCMP operation the Channel Speed and Asynchronous configuration values at the control DSU are downloaded to the tributaries on the control DSU s poll list every 10 seconds The downloading is accomplished via the management channel so there is no disruption to user transmitted data Network Modification When an additional tributary DSU is added to a multipoint circuit the new DSU is not automatically included in the control DSU s poll list and the tributary DSU will not allow
194. essed DSU may not currently have a DBM installed this allows the addition of a DBM to the DSU at a remote site A local telephone number can contain any of the characters listed in Table 5 12 Remember that the telephone number cannot contain any separating characters or spaces although other valid characters can be interspersed t p w and comma The Undo selection restores the number as it was originally displayed After entering the number save the local telephone number The Save selection would not be available if the DSU DBM was operating in Remote mode or if the DCP was locked CAUTION Do not use Save until after you have displayed and if necessary edited the local telephone number Refer to COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide to learn how to access this subbranch and for an example of how to enter or change the this telephone number Async Terminal The Async Terminal Term feature allows you to manage the DSU through menus displayed using a VT100 compatible asynchronous terminal This feature is available only for a Model 3610 standalone DSU with firmware version DSU SW ver 6 3x or greater This feature is enabled or disabled from this subbranch Once enabled the async terminal operates exactly as the DCP but without the limitation of the 2 line 16 character LCD An entire menu or
195. ew operator can monitor read DSU parameters and line status and can initiate tests from NetView but cannot change DSU configuration options a NetView constraint An NMS operator has complete control of the network and can change network configuration options as well as access sophisticated alarm tracking reports The carrier mounted Model 3611 DSU or the standalone Model 3610 DSU can receive the SNA Diagnostic Interface firmware Either model may be configured as the control of a circuit that is to be managed by the NetView management system Refer to Chapter 6 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide for configuration option information Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide for additional SNA Diagnostic Interface information LPDA 2 Addressing The addressing scheme for LPDA 2 establishes a relationship between the link segments primary circuit extended circuit and the remote DSUs populating the circuit It allows you to target a link segment or a particular control tributary DSU pair in the circuit for diagnostic testing The LPDA 2 address is independent of the DSU network address associated with an NMS or DCP command although you may choose to assign the same value to each NOTE In all of the illustrations the LPDA 2 addresses are shown in decimal
196. example if PrtSp for Port 3 is disabled the port number selections would be 1 2 4 5 or 6 Change Port 1 to Port 2 and disable the port for this example Port Number 1 A 4 Y Enter 2 BB 8 Port Number 2 Zs Y Enter A W 5 44 March 1999 3610 2 41 60 DSU Operations Prt2 Enable A Enab Disab C C NOTE If the DSU core is disabled enabling all ports in TDM or MCMP mode will not enable the DSU core You must specifically enable the DSU core Prt2 Disab A Command Complete A ee pep ee The local DBM can be enabled or disabled in the same manner as for the ports In Remote mode the following Transmitter Control submenu appears B Change TxCtl of A Devic Ports L8 Select Devic Device to enable or disable the DSU or DBM When selected the address entered determines whether the DSU or DBM is enabled or disabled Select Ports to enable or disable specific ports in Remote mode Select a port as previously demonstrated LEDs The LEDs selection is only available from the Local branch This selection allows you to monitor any of the TDM or MCMP ports at any given time When port is selected its lead activity is reflected in the DCP circuit designation status
197. f service the control Configuration Options MCMP will have an Out of Frame alarm Set the FEP port sharing configuration options for the e Ifa tributary is in Backup mode and the network control and tributary DSU MCMPs as follows problem has been fixed the only commands that Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode can be sent to the tributary from the control MCMP are aggregate tests e g the End to End test or Setup MUX Funct While in backup the tributary DSU can only be Share Disab addressed via the control DSU DBMs for Share DevB Disab diagnostics Creating a poll list at the DSU DBMs P1 2 FEPSh Enab for control Disab for tributary is acceptable but the poll list must be removed after P3 4 FEPSh Enab for control Disab for tributary the call is dropped or unnecessary alarms will 5 6 FEPSh Disab result MCMP Bckup TDM for tributaries only Inconfiguring the tributary MCMPs a combination Prti Prt3 and of TDM and MCMP rules apply There is Disab maximum of two port sharing groups with all ports RTS Cntrl N A for control DTE for tributary in the group being contiguous use the Sharing TxCarrSel Const for control and tributary iin tione Up sm RxCarrSel Const for control and tributary switched carrier configurations must be set Elast Stor Disab TxCarrSel set to Cntrl and RxCarrSel set to or Mark in TDM mode use the system d
198. f the values normally available to that option still appear but changes made have no effect the configuration option s value is not overwritten in software For a bridge configuration consisting of a central site bridge and one or more extended bridges digital bridge configuration options must be set for each DSU in the bridge Address each of the DSUs through the DCP and set the configuration options 5 34 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations TDM MODE TABLE TABLE TABLE TABLE TABLE 6 1 6 5 6 6 6 8 6 18 2 I I z I 6 9 E 12 Setup Prt amp I Csu DSU Gen DSU START 7 Cosy se TABLE TABLE TABLE I TABLE PRIMARY 6 2 6 3 6 4 MUX Y 2 AND I 1 6 OPTIONS SPEEDS SET E OPTIONS 6 16 MCMP MODE TABLE TABLE TABLE 7 lt x TABLE d I X TABLE 6 15 Com starr TABLE TABLE TABLE PRIMARY 6 2 6 3 6 4 MUX d PORT SET PORTS TABLE 6 16 SPEEDS 6 OPTIONS MCMP ge nee SET OPTIONS TABLE 6 17 ASSIGN MENTS BRIDGE MODE TABLE 4 TABLE 6 11 7 TABLE 6 13 Lo 9 Ge Func CBrdg or EBrdg SET PORTS 2 6 OPTIONS START c 6 2 er SET OPTIONS FOR PORT 1 DTE SET DIGITAL BRIDGE OPTIONS BASIC MODE TABLE TABLE TABLE iu um s 4 TABLES 6 9
199. figuration Confg branch allows you to configure or customize the DSU and its options DBM TDM and to fit site requirements to enter and change telephone numbers when a DBM is installed and to specify the protocol used by a connected NMS The Configuration branch menu varies with the options being configured When changing configuration options always select the mode first MUX Funct TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg or None in the MUX Setup option set When the TDM or MCMP option is installed the MUX and PrtSp Port Speed option sets appear When the DBM is installed the Diag Diagnostic DBM DBM and Bkup Backup options sets appear In addition the Dir Directory subbranch appears when the DBM option is installed It is through Dir that dial strings telephone numbers are entered changed and stored in the Backup Directory 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 31 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TOP LEVEL MENU Opts PList Phone Addr ChgMd ges Term Load Save gan 5 us Load Save Activ Delet Skip Save DPI DMC Chang Cir Enab Disab CID Load Save Pswrd Execute Load 1 Undo Activ T Ust Usr2 FacC FacT FacB o Activ Usr2 Usr3 SAVE DSU Diag DBM Gen Bkup MUX PriSp LPDA DSU DBM Gen DSU DBM Chan Activ Remt Usr Usr2 Address Setup 1 Prt4 Pri Activ Usr2 TDM MCMP CBrdg EBrdg None Copy Co
200. figuration for this scenario is as follows Network is a 2 drop DDS multipoint nondisruptive circuit operating at 56 kbps Two control DBMs with TDM are dedicated to the control DSU The MCMP is configured for three channels one 7 2 kbps one 4 8 kbps and one 2 4 kbps The DBM s are configured for 14 4 kbps Excess bandwidth must be reserved on the backup configuration so that framing and diagnostic data does not reduce the port speeds Therefore the DBM port speeds are configured to support the 4 8 and 7 2 kbps applications The 2 4 kbps application is not supported during backup DBM speeds must be the same or set to zero The tributary DBMs are configured for switched carrier operation on a per port basis no fallback and password security When the failure occurs the control DSU reports a Threshold exceeded alarm while tributaries are reported as having No Response alarms These alarms will continue to be reported until the DDS facility is restored There will be a subnetwork No Response alarm at the control MCMP for each tributary DSU that is out of service That happens even when the tributary is in Backup mode 4 7200 BPS B 4800 BPS C 2400 BPS A 7200 BPS 4800 BPS C 2400 BPS 494 13939 01 Figure D 14 FEP Port Sharing Configuration Dial Backup Not Active D 30 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Ifall tributary DSUs are out o
201. full backup Multipoint dial backup can provide both partial and full backup on DDS multipoint circuits For partial backup the DSU s rate must equal the DBM s rate Full backup must be performed if the DSU s rate is not equal to the DBM s rate e Security The V 32 DBM or DBM V the 4 wire Switched 56 DBM or DBM S or the 2 wire Switched 56 DBM or DBM D provide four levels of call setup security None Password Callback and Alarm Alarm allows the DBM DBM V DBM S or DBM D to answer only incoming calls when there is a Facility Alarm on the DDS line Restoration When the DSU rate equals the DBM rate tributary DSUs can be configured to automatically drop the backup connection and switch back to the DDS facility when service has been restored to the DDS network When the DSU rate is not equal to the DBM rate restoration can only be accomplished remotely from an NMS or manually from the control DSU s DCP e Setup A backup session can be set up automatically by the tributary DSUs if the DSU s rate is equal to the DBM s rate controlled remotely from an NMS or initiated manually from a control DSU s shared diagnostic control panel SDCP DSU with LPDA 2 Interoperability and TDM or MCMP The SNA Diagnostic Interface firmware upgrade using the Release 2 Link Problem Determination Aid LPDA 2 protocol is installed on the DSU circuit card LPDA 2 interoperability provides the following features Link Problem Determina
202. gle 56 kbps DDS multipoint circuit A typical example can be found in Figure D 12 where two high speed applications and a low speed application service two branches of a retail bank The high speed applications 19 2 kbps support teller workstations and platform terminals Channels and B respectively and the low speed application 4 8 kbps services automated teller machines ATMs Channel In addition the low speed application extended via the FEP port sharing feature of the control DSU and a dedicated multipoint circuit services several additional remote ATMs In the configuration shown in Figure D 12 the MCMP channels are assigned to different port numbers to illustrate channel assignment flexibility Pertinent configuration options for both the control DSU with MCMP and the Site 1 tributary DSU supporting this configuration scenario follow Configuration Options Set the FEP port sharing configuration options for the control and tributary DSU MCMPs as follows Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode e Setup MUX Funct MCMP Share DevA Disab Share DevB Disab P1 2 FEPSh Disab P3 4 FEP Sh Enab for control Disab for tributary P5 6 FEP Sh Disab Prti through Prt4 Prt5 and Prt6 N A AsyncSync Disab TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const Elast Stor Enab Prt4 only PrtSp DSU Prt1 19 2 Prt2 19 2 Prt3 4 8 Prt4 4 8 Prt5 and Prt6 Disab e PrtSp Chan Prtl Prt2 B
203. gured for Host contention taking its timing from the DDS clock When a failure occurs in the network serving two of the drops the two affected DSUs display a network fault Alrm LEDs light at the affected DSUs and begin DDS TimeOut for dial backup The NMS and control DSU display a Tributary Time out alarm for the two tributaries Data transmission to the other drop is not affected DDS 9600 BPS TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE 494 12890 02 Figure D 3 Digital Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Dial Backup Not Active D 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios When 1 minute elapses the two tributary DSUs Figure D 4 instruct their DBMSs to place a call to their respective DBM Vs at the central site Each tributary DSU DBM has been paired with a DBM V that is associated with the control DSU digital bridge at the central site The tributary s Backup Dir configuration option is a pointer to the telephone number stored in its Backup Directory for its associated DBM V each DBM calls a different DBM V After the pairs of DBMs exchange passwords the tributary DSU DBMs enter Data mode ready to send data After the tributary DSU DBM has set up the call each of the affected DSUs switches the DTE s data to its DBM As each associated DBM V enters Data mode the data is passed from the DBM V to the digital bridge The digital bridge s timing is still provided by the DDS netwo
204. h MCMP operating in MCMP mode can support up to six independent applications over a single 56 kbps standard multipoint digital facility Figure 4 16 shows three independent banking applications designated AA BB and CC that are operating over three parallel DDS multipoint circuits DATA CENTER CARRIER BRANCH 1 2 5 AA DDS 19 2 KBPS 1 Fee HOST COMPUTER 1 1 TELLER TELLER DDS 4 8 KBP DSU eae MOS 2 1 1 essi I I DSU DDS 2 4 KBPS I i CONTROL 1 AA TELLER APPLICATION ASSIGNED TO CHANNEL BB AUTOMATED TELLER MACHINE ATM APPLICATION ASSIGNED TO CHANNEL B i CC SECURITY APPLICATION ASSIGNED TO CHANNEL C 491 12996 Figure 4 16 Typical Parallel Networks 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 21 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units At the control DSU each application in Figure 4 16 is given its own channel A B or C and the channels are assigned to Ports 1 through 3 At each tributary branch location Channel A is assigned to Port 1 allowing the teller workstations connected to this port to access application AA Channel B is assigned to Port 2 allowing the ATMs connected to this port to access application BB and Channel C is assigned to Port 3 allowing the security systems connected to this port to access application CC CARRIER ang m FEP
205. h the installation Since the DSU is not connected to the network the red Alrm indicator is lit and the LCD displays No Signal indicating a facility alarm The LCD displays health and status information The red Alarm LED lights when there is no DDS signal NOTE If the test fails again contact your service representative to return the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide To reconnect cables p Procedure 1 2 Reconnect the DTE interface cable to the DSU Connect the TDM or digital bridge interface cable to the or and to the appropriate DTEs or DBM V or DBM S circuit cards Also attach the ferrite chokes provided with the DTE cables Figure 3 4 Based upon the Configuration Worksheet completed prior to the installation make any desired configuration option changes in the DSU Diag DSU DBM and Gen DBM Gen Bckup Setup and 1 through Prt6 PrtSp and LPDA option sets For information on these option sets refer to the Configuration Branch section in Chapter 5 3 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation PLASTIC SCREW 3611 DSU CIRCUIT CARD SNAPLOCK POST PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW EPROM e STANDOFF 3611 DSU NOTCH Ww FACEPLATE DOUBLE ENDED PINHEADER PHILLIPS SNAPLOCK 5 TDM OR MCM
206. he DSU displays Abrt For a DBM the Device Test is the only DBM test that does not require a dialed connection The DBM must be disabled or in Idle mode with no call in progress 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 15 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units If the DSU TDM or MCMP MUX or DBM fails the reported until the Device Test ends with a Pass in all test the second line displays Fail instead of Pass Also categories DSU MUX DBM Until then you can the Alarm Alrm status indicator lights and the failure is proceed but be aware that the DSU may not function reported in the DSU s Health and Status The Alarm properly indicator remains lit and the failure continues to be TRANSMITTER GENERATOR DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE BASIC MODE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE TDM MCMP PORT 2 PORT 3 DIE Pont coueanaron INTERFACE COMPARATOR PORT 5 PORT 6 TDM or MCMP MODE 490 12872 Figure 5 4 Device Test 5 16 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Loopback The Loopback Lpbk branch displays four loopbacks Local Loopback LL DTE Loopback DTE e Digital Loopback DL Remote Digital Loopback RL For additional information concerning loopbacks refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide Local Loopback Local Loopback LL is session disruptive performing the test will disrupt data Local Loopback permits
207. he wall outlet and be sure it is set to ON At the rear of the DSU Figure 2 7 insert the small end of the power cable into the power receptacle If you have a table top ac transformer connect the 3 prong plug to the ac outlet If you have a wall mount ac transformer connect the ac transformer to the ac outlet The unit performs a power up routine CAUTION Only use the power transformer designed for the Model 3610 DSU Using other transformers may result in personal injury or damage to the equipment Reinstall the factory configuration options use the FacT configuration for a tributary or FacC for a control Make any desired configuration changes in the DSU Diag DBM Gen Bckup MUX PrtSp and LPDA 2 option sets For information on the TDM or digital bridge option sets refer to the Unit Configuration section of this guide and the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide Power Up Routine When power is applied the DSU Determines what options are installed DBM or the or Runs a Device Test on the unit and each of the installed options During the tests all indicators on the DCP light briefly and the message Power Up Tests appears on the liquid crystal display LCD Displays the results of each test momentarily as Pas
208. header with an integral ferrite choke into its mating connector on the DSU Make sure that the double ended pin header is fully seated Return to the rear of the carrier and tighten the screws on the connector module Connect the DTE interface cables Figure 3 4 Install a ferrite choke provided with the 6 port connector module on each DTE cable as close to the cable connector as possible If your configuration requires a crossover cable part number 4951 035F see the documentation provided with the cables On power up the DSU determines what options are installed Refer to the Power Up Routine section of this chapter Based upon the Configuration Worksheet completed prior to the installation make any desired configuration option changes in the DSU Diag DSU DBM and Gen DBM Gen Bckup Setup and 1 through Prt6 PrtSp and LPDA option sets For information on these option sets refer to the Configuration Branch section in Chapter 5 Verify operation refer to the Verification Testing section of this chapter At this point MCMP capability is functional with all tributary DSUs on the MCMP poll list and DSU ports can be assigned to MCMP channels 3 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation Removing or MCMP from an Installed Model 3611 DSU To remove the TDM or MCMP circuit card gt Procedure 1 For a non modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit disconnect the
209. her 2 wire or 4 wire 1 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Overview DSU with Digital Bridge Capability The digital bridge capability is dedicated to a single DSU and the data terminal equipment DTE connected to that DSU is usually the controlling DTE of a multipoint network Both TDM and MCMP can be configured to provide the digital bridge capability The digital bridge capability can support many applications including dedicated multipoint dial backup and multipoint LADS operation This capability is used primarily for dedicated multipoint dial backup A digital data service multipoint network is backed up with public switched telephone network PSTN or switched 56 kbps calls between the central site and remote site DBMs that are tied together by the digital bridge The digital bridge capability when used to support dedicated multipoint dial backup provides the following features Number of tributaries Dedicated multipoint dial backup can back up as many as 20 tributary DSUs To do this four additional DSUs with TDM each configured for extended bridge EBrdg are required Multispeed operation Multipoint dial backup using the V 32 DBM or DBM V operates at a customer specified rate of 2 4 4 8 9 6 12 or 14 4 kbps full duplex Fallback training at a lower rate is not allowed Using either the 2 wire or 4 wire Switched 56 DBM DBM D or DBM S respectively the DBM operates at 56 kbps Partial and
210. hese commands include the following cho followed by the DSU s network address allows you to change the DSU Diagnostic DSU DBM and General General MUX Setup and Port Port Speed and LPDA configuration option sets e cho followed by the DBM s network address allows you to change the DBM Backup Diagnostic DSU DBM and General General MUX Setup and Port and Port Speed configuration option sets e cha followed by the DSU s serial number allows you to change the tributary DSU s network address For the 6700 Series NMS configuration options are menu driven Select Config Network Devices the appropriate submenu selection Tributary 3610 DSUs with TDM or MCMP can be configured from an NMS provided the Position configuration option Diagnostic General is set to Trib from the DCP and the DSU is connected to a control DSU that is connected to the NMS The COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS which uses the Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp fully supports configuration of the DSUs with TDM and multipoint dial backup or MCMP Refer to the NMS documentation as needed Configuration of the DSUs from an NMS using either the DPII or DMC protocol is subject to the same limitations identified in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide Network and LADS Connections For connection to the DDS switche
211. ided by the digital bridge interface cable which must be provided between the two DCE interfaces to present the data and control leads on the proper pins The pin assignments for this cable are provided in Appendix C For modular Model 3611 DSUs or Model 3610 DSUs with the digital bridge capability all port connectors are individual requiring a separate crossover cable for each bridge port When the digital bridge is active as shown in Figure 4 30 data from the controlling DTE flows to the CONTROLLING DATA DTE ROUTER PORT 1 PORT2 PORT 3 aggregate data path of the TDM or MCMP circuit card where it is broadcast to all ports in the digital sharing group In the receive direction when a tributary site is granted the channel data flows from the tributary site through the aggregate data path to the controlling DTE In Figure 4 30 the Bridge Rate configuration option is set to DSU The bridge operates at the same speed as the DDS core Configuration options are set via the DCP the Bridge Rate configuration option is discussed in the MUX Configuration Options section of Chapter 5 The DCE and transmission facilities needed to make the connection between the digital bridge and the tributary sites depends upon your use of the digital bridge Many applications are possible Three applications are discussed in the Multichannel Multipoint Multipoint Dial Backup and LADS Operation sections of this chapter DIGITAL BRIDGE
212. iguration options to be set on a per port basis MUX Setup Option Set Press the F2 key to select the mode of operation and access the MUX Setup submenu Chang MUX Opts A m 2 Prt4 5 The Setup selection displays the first configuration option in the Setup option set MUX Funct which is shown below and which selects the DSU TDM s or DSU MCMP s mode of operation MUX Funct MCMP A 5 TDM CA CBrdg EBrdg None Prev Select the DSU TDM s or DSU MCMP s mode of operation by making one of the following selections e TDM mode Set MUX Funct to TDM MCMP mode Set MUX Funct to MCMP This mode is only available to DSU MCMP Bridge mode Set Funct to CBrdg for the TDM or MCMP circuit card to operate as a central site bridge or to EBrdg for the TDM or MCMP circuit card to operate as an extended bridge e Basic mode Set MUX Funct to None to disable the TDM or MCMP circuit card NOTE Always select the mode MUX Funct first then set the configuration options within the option set The mode affects the configuration options that are available as well as the values that are displayed for each 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 33 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Figure 5 13 maps mode of operation to the applicable Configuration Option Tables refer to Chapter 6 of the
213. igure 2 4 Disconnect the LCD flat cable by gently working the cable not the connector free of its connector Be careful not to bend any of the cable pins THREAD CUTTING SCREWS 2 EXPANDED BASE Disconnect the TDM MCMP flat cable Unscrew the three screws that hold the DSU circuit card in place Remove the DSU from the base Carefully lift the DSU up until its connectors are free of the rear panel Set the DSU on a clean ESD anti static workpad OR MCMP FLAT CABLE SCREW WITH CAPTIVE LOCK WASHER S bn SNAP a E TABS 4 E a oe OR MCMP e 2 PANEL 494 13846b Figure 2 4 Assembling Disassembling the TDM or MCMP 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Changing the Flex Interface Switch The TDM or MCMP field installation upgrade is shipped from the factory with the switch position set to EIA 232 The following procedure tells you how to change this setting to V 35 or back to EIA 232 gt Procedure 1 Determine whether the port interfaces will be strapped for EIA 232 or V 35 2 Locate interface Switch 51 on the TDM Flex or MCMP Flex circuit card Figure 2 5 If you have the 6 port version of the TDM Flex or MCMP Hlex Switch S1 has four straps but only Strap 1 is used S1 is not installed on 2 port versions of the TDM Flex or MCMP Flex YELLOW GREEN V 35 EIA 232 Inse
214. ing in band secondary channel transport communications Selecting Prt1 allows both the test pattern and in band secondary channel transport data to propagate the data path in band secondary channel transport communications are preserved NOTE If the Bilat Lpbk Bilateral Loopback configuration option is enabled requesting a Digital Test on a port automatically initiates a DTE Loopback on the port as well Requesting an aggregate Remote Digital Loopback automatically initiates a DTE Loopback on all of the ports NOTE A control DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point or multipoint network whereas a tributary DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point network only A Digital Test can also be run on a DBM over a backup connection or to a remote DBM for point to point testing On a DBM V DBM S or DBM D a Digital Test can be run over a backup connection to a remote DBM for multipoint testing To access the Digital Test from the top level menu make the following selections Local Fl e Test DBM select active core e DT e Start Port Select when not operating in single port mode e Trib Address multipoint control DBM only e Run Time duration of the Digital Test For TDM or MCMP mode the following additional menu appears Port Number E Prt2 e A lt gt Prid Pris Aggr For a single port DSU
215. ing Configuration D 26 D 13 Dedicated MCMP Backup Configuration with Switched 56 DBMs D 27 14 MCMP FEP Port Sharing Configuration Dial Backup Not Active D 30 D 15 MCMP FEP Port Sharing Configuration Dial Backup Active D 31 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units List of Tables Table Page 4 Gonnechon Wistances pota bae din aed 4 48 5 1 TDM MCMP Status Indicators Model 3611 5 5 5 2 DSU with TDM or MCMP and DBM V DBM S DBM D Status Indicators 5 6 2 4 DITE Lead Stas COGS u Debe thv re PEE REM 5 10 53 4 Circuit Quality Measurements bU dees 5 11 53 9 Backup Branch Menu Selections gt be REPE sods 5 13 3 6 Digital 5 22252255945 hex ves babet be Ade bee E sacs 5 27 5 7 End to End Test Results 55 5 28 39 Bit Error Rate Test Results 224 42 rac ee Bae Pared eg anes 5 29 5 9 Complete List of MUX Setup Configuration Options 5 36 5 10 Complete List of MUX Port Configuration Options 5 38 3S H Poll List Mem Options 1321 9 diode PER anes 5 40 3 12 Directory Entry and Password Characters 2 224 55 850 86 6 6 86 5 42 5 13 Control Branch Menu OpUOPS t Ep OR 5 43 C 1
216. ing in an MCMP Circuit LPDA 2 Monitoring 4 61 Sel Model 3611 DSU and TDM 22522256 ues 5 3 5 24 Model 3611 DSU and MCMP Faceplates cese bb ioke RP 5 4 5 3 DBM V DBM S and DBM D Faceplates 5 4 S Device DOS iab sabe p ae UU 5 16 2 2 dLocab LOGDDAC E 51 5 17 2 0 DYE Loopback MER POP pU 5 19 327 Dental Loophack EU FR P Ade 5 20 250 Remote Digital Loopback ac IH 5 22 3 9 Bilateral Loopback is 5 24 FI cuero diu POMPEII EE Ue REPE 5 26 S1 IEndto BEnd Test nho tre REED 5 28 5 12 Error Rate Tests in TDM or MCMP Mode 5 30 5 13 Choosing Mode of Operation and Setting Configuration Options 5 35 C 1 Interface Cable Feature Number 3600 F2 500 C 2 C 2 Digital Bridge Interface Cable Feature Number 3600 2 501 C 5 C 3 Pin Locations on the 60 Position High Density Connector of the Non Modular Carmer Mounted TDM MCMP Circuit Card uan repere C 8 C 4 Modular DSU V 35 Adapter 3000 F1 510
217. interface connector the multiport cable provides for 6 port multiplexing or digital sharing The modular or MCMP contains gold finger contacts on the rear edge of the circuit card and is used with the 6 port connector module that contains six DB25 connectors There is one connector for each port and a multiport cable is not needed The 6 port connector module also provides a 26 pin high density D type connector for a V 35 interface for Port 1 and is located at the top of the module This connector requires a 6 port V 35 Interconnect Cable that must be ordered separately The non modular TDM or MCMP can be installed on a non modular or modular DSU while the modular TDM or MCMP can only be installed on a modular DSU With the non modular TDM or MCMP the DTE cables must be removed before removing the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit from the carrier However with the modular TDM or you can remove the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit from the from of the carrier without disconnecting the DTE cables from the rear of the carrier Low voltage ac power from the carrier s backplane is provided to the TDM or MCMP circuit card and a power supply on the TDM or MCMP circuit card produces the regulated dc operating voltage Models 3610 and 3611 with SNA Diagnostic Interface The Models 3610 and 3611 with the SNA Diagnostic Interface or LPDA 2 consist of a firmware upgrade that allows the DSU to be controlled by NetView A 3600 Series DSU c
218. ion capabilities The V 32 DBM has V 32 core which complies with the CCITT V 32 modem recommendation 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TDM Applications capability can be used in variety of configurations to enhance DDS service Configurations discussed here include point to point multiplexing a TDM backbone circuit with extensions diagnostic extension digital sharing multiplexing and digital sharing and FEP port sharing Single Port Async Sync Support When operating with the Async Sync configuration option enabled a single port point to point or multipoint circuit can operate using nondisruptive diagnostics Diag Type NonD Point to Point Single Port Async Sync Capability When operating with the Async Sync configuration option enabled a single port point to point circuit can operate using nondisruptive diagnostics The control DSU s port speed and the tributary DTE port speeds must be set to the same rate see Figure 4 4 Note that the tributary DSUs are configured as a single port sharing group Share DevA Enab CARRIER sync yne Enal Async gt S Enab DSU PrtSp Kbps 9 6 OTHER CARRIERS 1 NMS ADDRESS DATA PATH DIAGNOSTIC PATH 19 2 KBPS NonD Refer to Table 1 2 of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Model 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide for the maximum
219. ios The following scenarios describe four possible backup processes which are used in typical customer networks automatic partial backup multipoint dial backup with tributary digital sharing device and network management controlled backup Read these scenarios each contains descriptions that are common to many applications Automatic Partial Backup The assumed configuration for an automatic partial backup scenario Figure D 3 shows when dial backup is not active while Figure D 4 shows when dial backup is active is as follows e Network is a 3 drop DDS multipoint network operating at 9600 bps e Customer wants automatic backup controlled by the tributary DSUs e Three central site DBM Vs are dedicated to the control DSU and are connected to its digital bridge 9600 BPS DIGITAL BRIDGE CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg CARRIER The control and tributary DSUs are configured for mixed diagnostics Tributary DBMs are configured for 9 6 kbps operation automatic backup no fallback backup on network fault Network Time out period of 1 minute outgoing call setup with password security and automatic restoration of DDS after 5 minutes Central site DBM Vs are configured for 9 6 kbps operation no fallback and auto answer with password security Digital bridge is configured as a central site bridge has Bridge Rate set to DSU has Ports DCE first port of the digital bridge through Prt4 active and confi
220. ipoint dial backup The status indicators on these circuit cards continuously provide information on the DBM V s DBM S s or DBM D s current operating condition functioning in a manner similar to the indicators on the DSU Table 5 2 describes the function of the DBM V DBM S or DBM D faceplate indicators SDCP and SDU status indicators are unchanged by the presence of a TDM or MCMP circuit card To view SDCP and SDU status indicator tables refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Status OK Alrm O Test O Dial O Front Panel Multirate Status OK Alrm DSU 3611 496 12349 01 496 12350c 01 Figure 5 1 Model 3611 DSU and TDM Faceplates 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Status Status Status Status Status OK OK OK OK OK Alrm Alrm Alrm Alrm Alrm O Test O Test O Test O Test Dial Dial O Dial O Dial 103 TXD 103 TXD 103 TXD 103 TXD 104 RXD 104 RXD 104 RXD 104 RXD 105 RTS 105 RTS 105 RTS 105 RTS 106 CTS 106 CTS 106 CTS 106 CTS 107 DSR 107 DSR 107 DSR 107 DSR 108 DTR 108 DTR 108 DTR 108 DTR 109 LSD 109 LSD 109 LSD 109 LSD O O O O Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Multirate DSU 3611 496 12349 01 496 12350b 01 496 12349d 01 Figure 5 2 Model 3611 DSU and MCMP Figure 5 3 DBM V DBM S and DBM D Facep
221. isable the DSU DBM and access and monitor the external leads for Ports 1 through 6 The circuit designation status indicators TXD RXD etc reflect the status of the selected port NOTE In most of the examples that follow additional menu selections that do not fit onto the DSU s screen are shown beneath the DCP To display those menu selections press the or gt key to scroll the selections into view Each selection leads to a functional subbranch of the menu tree Five factors determine which selections or options are available e Whether the DSU is in Display mode and the DSU s mode of operation e Whether the DSU is a control or tributary e Whether your selections are from the Local or Remote branch Local or Remote mode e Whether a DBM is installed e Whether TDM or MCMP is installed Refer to the menu in Appendix A You will see Port Select under some of the menu selections which means that a Port Number screen will appear when operating in TDM or Bridge mode Use the F1 and F2 keys to display the port number of your choice then press the F3 key to activate your choice The following sections highlight only those areas of the DCP menu and operation that are unique to operating in TDM or Bridge mode For information on how to access menu branches and DCP operation regardless of the options installed refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Mod
222. kbps Dial Backup In this configuration shown in Figure D 2 the Switched 56 DBMs provide the capability for full backup of a TDM circuit operating at 56 kbps If the DDS circuit operates at less than 56 kbps the Switched 56 DBM uses rate adaption to match the DDS speed For this scenario the DSU supports three applications running at 4 8 kbps 9 6 kbps and 19 2 kbps During dial backup the ports can be set to the same speed since the DSU rate is the same as the DBM rate In this example dial backup is configured for automatic dial backup and automatic restoration for both the control and the tributary and LPDA 2 is enabled Make sure that you enter at least 2 minutes difference between the control s Network Time Out NtwkTimOut configuration option and the tributary s Configuration Options For TDM scenario 2 use the Configuration Worksheet for TDM Mode and set the configuration options that follow for both the control and tributary DSUs NMS OR ASYNC TERMINAL CARRIER NETVIEW HOST psu PORT pat SP PRT SP 1 4800 4800 2 9600 9600 3 19200 19200 Figure D 2 TDM Configuration Scenario 2 Switched 56 kbps Dial Backup e Setup MUX Funct TDM Share DevA Disab Share DevB Disab P1 2 FEPSh Disab P3 4 FEP Sh Disab P5 6 FEP Sh Disab e Prti Prt2 and Prt4 through Prt6 N A AsyncSync Disab TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const Elast Stor Disab RTS
223. lates Faceplates 5 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Table 5 1 and Status Indicators Model 3611 Only Label Color Description OK Green Health and status indicator The TDM or MCMP hardware and software are operating normally This indicator flashes two times per second if a message is present Alrm Red Health and status indicator An alarm condition in the TDM or MCMP hardware firmware or configuration data is disrupting normal operation of the or MCMP processor Configuration alarms may be caused by a voltage spike on the input power line or momentary loss of power the DSU automatically reloads the TDM or MCMP configuration options When the reload procedure is completed the Alrm LED goes Off and the TDM or MCMP OK LED comes ON Port 1 2 3 4 5 Green In TDM or MCMP mode shows which port is being monitored the or 6 status of the port s leads is displayed on the faceplate of the associated DSU Any one of the six ports can be monitored at any given time the port to be monitored is selected at the DCP or SDCP If the aggregate Aggr is monitored all LEDs will be ON In Bridge mode the port LEDs perform a very different function Each second the LEDs indicate which ports had RTS ON during the last second If the port is connected to a DCE device the port RTS becomes the received LSD signal of the DCE device Therefore the LEDs indicate which ports had upstream
224. lays status information from a DSU s subnetwork all DSUs and DBMs assigned to that DSU s active poll list The downstream network addresses and current statuses are listed For a complete list of Health and Status messages refer to Appendix C of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 36 1 Operator 5 Guide Device Health and Status The Device Health and Status Devic selection reports health and status information for a selected DSU NOTE If five minutes elapse without a key being pressed the Device Health and Status screen is redisplayed To access Device Health and Status from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Stat e H S e Devic Results When the digital circuit is the active link the first line displays a running normal operation timer hhh mm ss The second line displays the DSU s operating rate and can also display one or more of the test or alarm messages listed in Appendix C of the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide An asterisk appears at the far right to indicate NMS activity right arrow appears just before the asterisk if there is more than one existing message For a DSU with TDM or the Device Health and Status of the TDM or MCMP is incorporated into the health and status of the DSU along with any test or alarm involving the TDM or
225. lexing and Digital Sharing 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 13 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units FEP Port Sharing FEP port sharing is a method of connecting a front end processor FEP to multiple control DSUs modems to broadcast the same message over different circuits yet receive individual responses typical example be found in the retail banking environment Figure 4 10 where two high speed applications Channels A and B in the figure service a branch of a retail bank and the lower speed automated teller machine ATM application Channel C in the figure services an ATM at the retail branch as well as several remote ATMs The ATM application is extended by a FEP port sharing group Ports 3 and 4 at the control DSU and by a dedicated multipoint circuit NOTE When FEP port sharing is enabled the corresponding port must operate in switched carrier mode V 13 Signaling may be used Set the tributary DSU s port RTS Cntrl configuration option to DTE and its TxCarrSel configuration option to Cntrl Set the control DSU s port RxCarrSel configuration option to Cntrl In addition at the control DSU FEP port sharing can be combined with digital sharing at one or more tributary DSUs In this case V 13 Signaling cannot be used Instead the control DSU must have its RxCarrSel configuration option set to Mark FEP port sharing is accomplished with adjacent pairs of ports on the TDM or MCMP circuit c
226. ll go Then push down on the tiny latching mechanism Being careful not to bend the pins align the LCD flat cable to its connector Then gently push the cable pins back into place 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 15 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Reassembling the Unit Refer to Figure 2 4 as you close the unit and Figure 2 8 to reconnect cables gt Procedure l Align the cover over the expanded base and rear panel Make sure the four snap tabs are over their corresponding slots two in front and two in back Apply pressure at the four snap tab connecting points pressing together until all four tabs snap securely into their slots Reconnect the power cord to the DSU labeled POWER referring back to Figure 2 8 Plug the 3 prong plug of the table top ac transformer into the ac outlet If installing a 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex and the DSU has a wall mount ac transformer the wall mount ac transformer must be replaced with a table top ac transformer If installing a 2 port TDM Flex or MCMP Hlex on a unit having wall mount ac transformer plug the ac transformer into the ac outlet On power up the DSU determines what options TDM or MCMP are installed Refer to Power Up Routine in this chapter Verify operation refer to Verification Testing section in this chapter If the keypad and or LCD functions fail check the Keypad and LCD flat cables for proper installation Pe
227. loopbacks and ring indicator During normal operation Pin 12 is ON for Ports 2 through 6 During dial backup Pin 12 is Off for Ports 2 through 6 In TDM mode if External Lead is configured for Rate Ext Leads Rate then this lead is used for speed selection on a port connecting to an analog private line APL extended circuit when the DDS backbone goes into backup This pin signals the APL modem to fall back to the predetermined backup speed if the APL modem has fallback capability 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units 12 INCHES OVERALL CONNECTOR 34 PIN SOCKET CONNECTOR 493 13833 01 Figure 6 6 Port V 35 Interconnect Cable Feature Number 3600 F3 500 C 16 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 8 6 Port V 35 Interconnect Cable Connector 26 Pin Connector Sd D Connectar Connector Module Sport v s M nterconnect Cable Circuit Name Pin Number Pin Number 7 B Signal Ground SG 4 C Request to Send RTS 5 D Clear to Send CTS 6 E Data Set Ready DSR 8 F Received Line Signal Detect LSD 20 H Data Terminal Ready DTR 22 J Ring Indicator RI 1 18 L Local Loopback LL 21 N Remote Digital Loopback RL 2 14 P S Transmit Data TXD 3 16 R T Received Data RXD 15 12 Y Transmitter Signal Element Timing DCE Source ST 17 9 V X Receiver Sig
228. loying point to point transmission is referred to as a point to point circuit 4 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Multipoint Transmission In multipoint transmission Figure 4 1 a control DSU is connected through the digital facility to multiple tributaries communicating at the same rate Traditionally a tributary site often referred to as a drop can transmit data only when it is polled by the front end processor FEP The FEP a communications computer associated with a host computer is the data terminal equipment DTE at the control DSU umm y umi DSU CONTROL DDS CIRCUIT A 3600 Series DSU can be configured as a control or as a tributary multipoint transmission control 3610 or 3611 DSU provides diagnostic support for up to 40 addressable tributary devices using MCMP multipoint nondisruptive or mixed diagnostics Without diagnostics and poll list 254 addressable devices are supported A circuit employing multipoint transmission is referred to as a multipoint circuit TRIBUTARY DSU TRIBUTARY DSU TRIBUTARY 492 12894 01 Figure 4 1 Multipoint Transmission 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Modes Of Operation A DSU with TDM or MCMP can operate in one of four modes TDM mode MUX Funct TDM MCMP mode MUX Funct MCM
229. multipoint configurations if nondisruptive diagnostics are enabled the configuration option M Pt SymPrt must also be enabled This is because the TDM circuit card cannot support an asymmetrical port speed In this example Ports 1 through 6 at each tributary DSU are in the digital sharing group If contention is not enabled the DSU allows any DTE to send data whenever it raises RTS If contention is enabled CTS to a requesting port is not granted until the currently active port drops its RTS If multiple RTS signals appear the DSU gives CTS to the lower numbered port Data received by a digital sharing group is broadcast to all DTEs in the group Broadcast is the delivery of a transmission to two or more communicating devices at the same time CROSSOVER CABLE CARRIER MODEM MODEM 2400 ons e 2400 BPS 9600 BPS PORT 1 2400 BPS 2390 BPS 3 2400 BPS 2390 BPS OCCUPIES TWO PHYSICAL SLOTS THIS PORT IS SET TO 2400 BPS BUT IS RUNNING UNDERSPEED CROSSOVER CABLE IS REQUIRED Figure 4 7 TDM 492 12842 01 with Extended Circuit 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 11 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units CARRIER A DDS 9 6 KBPS 9 6 KBPS A A 9 6 KBPS A A A A CARRIER DDS 9 6 5 9 6 KBPS DSU 9 6 5 9 6
230. nab TxElasStor Disab RxElasStor Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Dial Test Enab Primary Core No DTRCallCon Disab EchoCancel Disab e Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Cntrl DTE CTS Cntrl Std Backup Dir enter Dir number 1 to 10 BckupOnCMI Enab AutoRestor Enab NtwkTimOut enter 1 minute RestorTimOut enter 5 minutes TriesTimOut enter 1 minute MultiCall Disab LPDA LPDA 2 Disab Multipoint Full Dial Backup with Nondisruptive Diagnostics The multipoint network in Figure D 6 consists of a Model 3611 DSU with a digital bridge and two DBM Ss and two a Model 3610 DSUs with Switched 56 DBMs Since the DSUs are configured for nondisruptive diagnostics Diag Type NonD in band framing is necessary and all DSU DTE interfaces operate at 55600 bps In addition it is assumed that the host polls for all data traffic In this scenario the dial backup process will be initiated and controlled from the 6800 Series NMS a 6700 Series NMS can also be used All tributary DSUs should be listed in the control DSU s poll list NOTE For this scenario DBM Ss are used however DBM Ds can also be used March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios NMS HOST CARRIER 4 SDU DDS 56000 osu 4 FAILURE lt 56000 E 56 DEM 3610 3610 DSU TRIBUTARY 55600
231. nal Element Timing DCE Source RT 24 11 U W Transmitter Signal Element Timing DTE Source TT 25 NN Test Mode TM 1 Ring Indicator is only available on a DBM D DBM S or DBM V at this time 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 17 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units C 18 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios OVERVIEW Jo D 1 TON COS rou SORA OSs nu xb e PR Re ete geh On ertet D 2 TDM Scenario 1 Using Two Synchronous Channels D 2 TDM Scenario 2 Using Switched 56 kbps Dial Backup D 4 Digital Bridge Configuration Scenarios ec eee nb eee eek eds D 6 Automatic Partial BACKUP 252 eere P aceti e aedes D 6 Tm D 8 Multipoint Full Dial Backup with Nondisruptive Diagnostics D 10 Automatic Partial Backup Using an Extended Bridge D 14 Network Management Controlled Full Backup Using an Extended Bridge D 19 MCMP Configuration Scenarios u neh ven tac p EX a eR Le eC RU REY TRIS D 25 MCMP Using Port Sharing s D 25 Dedicated MCMP Backup with Switched 56 DBMS D 27 MCMP Backup Using PEP Port Sharing e
232. nd 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide End to End Test The End to End test is used to analyze a control and tributary DSU or DBM and the network circuit between them in both directions independently Figure 5 11 If an End to End test is performed the in band secondary channel transport communications are disrupted This test is a half duplex test that runs in both DSUs and DBMs Each DSU and DBM sends the same pattern to the other and checks the incoming pattern for errors During the test the TXD RXD and RTS indicators show internal activity which may differ from the states of the same leads at the DTE interface test between two DBMs requires dial network connection between them DTE connections to the TEUR Information Displayed modules are not required The End to End test is Time Running test timer The Clr performed on a DBM and is session disruptive when a selection resets the timer to dial backup session is active and nondisruptive when it is 0 00 00 not active Tot Error Running count of bits in error if To access the End to End test from the top level menu the maximum error count of make the following selections 64 000 is reached max appears The Clr selection e Local F1 resets the counter to 0 e Test Err Secs Running count of errored seconds The Clr selection DSU or DBM select active core resets the counter to 0 BE Run on If this test
233. nerated by a control DSU CROSSOVER DCE DSU DBM TXD 2 RXD 3 ST 15 RT 17 TT PLUG TO PLUG CROSSOVER CABLE CABLE DIGITAL BRIDGE TXD RXD ST RT TT 494 12850 03 Figure 4 40 Digital Bridge DSU Interface 4 52 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation SNA Diagnostic Interface The SNA Diagnostic Interface option which is compatible with IBM s LPDA 2 Line Problem Determination Aid Revision 2 protocol enables management of 3600 Series DSUs from the DCP Paradyne NMS IBM s NetView management system or all three DSUs on the circuit must be 3600 Series DSUs This option is compatible with all other options available to the 3600 Series DSUs DBM TDM and MCMP However the SNA Diagnostic Interface option is supported via Port 1 on a TDM or MCMP circuit card The 3600 Series DSUs operating with the SNA Diagnostic Interface option emulate 5822 DSUs although they are all data compatible they are not diagnostically compatible with IBM 5822 DSUs A mixture of 3600 Series and IBM 5822 DSUs will not support LPDA 2 diagnostics The SNA Diagnostic Interface option must be installed in each control and tributary DSU The 3600 Series DSUs operating with the SNA Diagnostic Interface option can respond to commands from NetView or an NMS or the DSU s DCP The 3600 Series DSUs respond to commands from an NMS or NetView on a first come first served basis The NetVi
234. nnectivity during a test condition Upstrm Port Specify the upstream port number when X X X an extended control has main channel connectivity to its tributary DTE Port Specify whether the port operates as an X X X EIA 232 or V 35 interface Port Speed Configuration Options The Load from submenu displays the following selections The Port Speed PrtSp submenu allows you to change the primary and backup port speed configurations for TDM mode and the primary port speed and SAVE DSU DBM Gen channel to port assignment configurations for MCMP mode For single port operation this option is available through the DSU submenu option set Edit Save A MUX PrsSp A Port speeds can be changed from either the NMS or from the DCP of the control DSU F1 F2 F3 To access the PrtSp submenu from the top level menu make the following selections LPDA Local F1 or Remote F2 and Address Confg Select the PrtSp submenu Opts If in TDM mode the following is displayed Load from Activ e Press the D gt key to scroll the PrtSp selection into A jr Al view Select the option set to be edited or changed Selecting DSU allows you to change the primary port speed configurations selecting DBM allows you to change the backup port speed configurations 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 39 COMSPHERE 3600
235. nt or a multipoint network A tributary DSU can only initiate this test in a point to point network To access BERT from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remot F2 and Address e Test DSU or DBM select active core BERT Port Select when not operating in single port mode or Ager Selecting Aggr Aggregate allows the test pattern data to propagate the data path This 15 the same loopback configuration as Basic mode If nondisruptive diagnostics are in effect the in band secondary channel transport communications are disrupted The Bit Error Rate Test is not available in Bridge mode DBM BERT CA Start A 8 08 L8 CJ If the BERT is already in progress Start will not be displayed To abort the Bit Error Rate Test press the Zx key twice To display the results of the test select Displ To clear the results of the test and clear the counters to zero select Clr Results When the message Command Complete is displayed any key except the 2 key returns you to the Bit Error Rate Test submenu If the test is aborted the top line of the display shows Final instead of Active Table 5 8 defines the information displayed after a Bit Error Rate Test has been completed Table 5 8 Bit Error Rate Test Results Results Information Displayed Time Running test timer The Clr selection resets the timer to 0 00 00 Running count of bits
236. o m TRIBUTARY ES DIGITAL BRIDGE CBrdg CIRCUIT CARD OPERATING IN CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE MODE pe DTE TRIBUTARY 494 12847 04 Figure 4 28 Multipoint with Digital Bridging 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 35 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units If more bridging capability is needed additional extended bridges can be added to a central site bridge to DSU TDM or DSU MCMP units configured as an provide a total of 20 bridging ports depending upon the extended bridge EBrdg can be connected to the application Figure 4 29 central site bridge the controlling bridge Up to four CONTROLLING DTE CARRIER ni PORT 1 CENTRAL SITE C BRIDGE DIGITAL BRIDGE PORT 1 DIGITAL BRIDGE EXTENDED E BRIDGE AND ASSOCIATED DBM V DBM S OR DBM D TO THREE MORE FULLY LOADED EXTENDED BRIDGES 494 12849 02 Figure 4 29 Maximum Bridging Capability Up to 20 Bridging Ports 4 36 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation For non modular Model 36 1 DSUs with digital bridge capability a digital bridge interface crossover cable attaches to the 60 pin high density connector on the TDM or MCMP circuit card to provide fan out cabling to five individual 25 pin EIA 232 connectors Since a digital bridge port provides a DCE interface and the digital bridge port connects to equipment that also provides a DCE interface the crossover function is prov
237. odels 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide MUX Configuration Options There are two submenus in the menu tree dedicated to configuring the TDM or MCMP MUX and PrtSp These submenus are used to select the mode of operation or function Bridge or None and to set the port options port or channel speeds an underspeed port if needed or channel assignment to ports To access the MUX submenu from the top level menu make the following selections Local F1 or Remote F2 and Address Confg Opts Load from Activ e Press the gt key to scroll the MUX selection into view 5 32 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations The Load from submenu displays the following selections SAVE DSU DBM Edit Save A m A PrtSp Press the lt lt key to scroll the SAVE DSU and DBM selections into view press the D gt key to scroll the PrtSp selection into view Select MUX and the following appears Chang MUX Opts A Setup A ri rs Prt2 Pr4 Pris Prt6 With the Copy selection configuration options set for one port can be copied over to either a single port or to all other ports The Setup selection allows the TDM or MCMP to be disabled enabling Basic mode or the TDM or MCMP to be enabled enabling TDM or MCMP mode or Bridge mode Selections Prt1 through Prt6 allow conf
238. of the Model 3610 TDM Flex the 2 port TDM Flex and the 6 port TDM Flex With one of these features installed each port can be set as either an EIA 232 or V 35 interface When a port other than Port 1 is used for V 35 operation a cable adapter is required feature number 3000 F1 510 When a Model 3610 TDM DSD digital sharing device is ordered Ports 2 through 6 are configured for EIA 232 operation With these models you can select either ELA 232 or V 35 operation for this port group Multiplexing The TDM option provides time division multiplexing for up to six independent ports over one standard DDS digital data service point to point facility e Line speeds TDM capability operates at all line speeds supported by the 3600 Series DSU 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 56 and 64 kbps full duplex 1 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Overview Port speeds Speeds of the individual TDM ports 1 through 6 can be set to 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 8 7 2 8 4 9 2 9 6 12 14 4 16 8 18 18 8 19 2 28 8 32 38 4 48 56 or 64 kbps full duplex The sum of the port speeds cannot exceed the line speed Asynchronous operation Although the DSU provides synchronous transmission through the DDS network any one or more of the six ports can be configured for asynchronous operation The TDM capability provides the asynchronous to synchronous conversion on these ports In addition to synchronous data rates asynchronous data rate
239. on When the DSU rate equals the DBM rate the tributary DSUs can be configured to drop the backup call and switch back to the DDS network when they detect that the DDS network is restored for a customer specified time This feature automatically restores all control and tributary DSUs to the DDS network and drops all dial backup calls There is no test of the DDS line during automatic restoration of multipoint tributary DSUs Setup DBM Rate Less Than DSU Rate For a network running at DDS 19 2 kbps or greater with DBM Vs V 32 backup only only full backup is possible and it can only be accomplished manually either from the SDCP or initiated by an NMS In either case commands are sent to the control DSU having the digital bridge capability and to the DBM Vs commanding the control DSU to activate the digital bridge and the DBM Vs to call the DBMs at the tributary sites The DBM Vs and tributaries need to be paired off and in each DBM V a pointer must be set to the telephone number of the associated tributary DBM Thus each DBM V will call a different DBM Each DBM DBM V pair should have compatible security options If there is a failure in the backbone DDS network the control DSU reports a Facility Alarm FA or Tributary Time out Alarm Time to the NMS The 6700 Series NMS software provides a Commands pull down window to access Standby Facility When aware of the failure the 6800 Series NMS commands the control DSU to a
240. onfiguration Worksheet for Basic Mode DSU Rate Kbps 56 PrtSp Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type 3600e Diag DBM Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 RemoteDiag Enhan Diag Gen Position Trib LinkConfig M Pt Resp Period 1 M Pt SymPrt Disab DBM Rate Kbps 14 4 PrtSp Kbps 14 4 CarrLossDisc Yes Auto Retrain Yes Single Rate Yes AutoAnswer Enab TxElasStor Disab RxElasStor Disab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password V 13 Signl Enab Primary Core No Gen DTE Port V 35 RTS Cntrl DTE Bkup Auto Bckup Disab AutoRestor Disab D 24 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios MCMP Configuration Scenarios There are three different MCMP scenarios described in this section one FEP port sharing scenario and two dial backup scenarios MCMP Using FEP Port Sharing The 3600 Series DSUs with MCMP capability are targeted towards financial services and information processing customers These customers banks brokerages and data processing houses usually have two or more parallel multipoint analog private line APL circuits that terminate at a branch office Each of these circuits is typically set for a different speed and response time depending on application requirements Using the MCMP capability these multipoint circuits can be replaced by a sin
241. onnected using the FEP port sharing feature should be set to the same port speed or disabled Disab in the Port Speed PrtSp configuration options for both the DSU and DBM Pseudo controlled carrier operation must be enabled in the tributary to control direction for all ports that are part of the FEP port sharing connection Set RTS Cntrl to DTE TxCarrSel to Cntrl at the tributary and RxCarrSel to Cntrl at the control CROSSOVER CABLE DCE DSU DBM TXD 2 RXD 3 ST 15 RT 17 TT PLUG TO PLUG CROSSOVER CABLE Since the dial backup operation is performed in TDM mode the MCMP channel to port assignment capability is not available Port 1 at the control DBM should map to Port 1 at the tributary DBM In addition only two DSD groups can be supported during the backup If there is a DSD group at the tributary the pseudo carrier control configuration option should not be used for the port corresponding to the DSD group Instead set RxCarrSel to Mark at the control DBM and TxCarrSel to Const at the tributary DBM Figure 4 26 shows how the digital bridge interface cable completes the communication path between a digital bridge port and its associated DCE With a non modular DSU MCMP a digital bridge interface cable is required with a modular DSU MCMBP only crossover cables are required DIGITAL BRIDGE TXD RXD ST RT TT 494 12850 03 Figure 4 26 Digital Bridge DCE Interface 3610 A2 GB41 60 March
242. options The DSU is ready to connect to the network and is configured as a control DSU for operation at 9 6 kbps on a point to point circuit with diagnostic protocol set to ADp When a TDM or MCMP is installed Port 1 of the DSU is configured to operate at 9 6 kbps with the TDM or MCMP capability enabled all other ports are disabled NOTE In this guide Model 3611 refers to either the modular or the non modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unless otherwise specified A shared diagnostic control panel SDCP installed in the carrier is required for installation and maintenance of the Model 3611 DSU TDM or DSU MCMP Installation of the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP and carrier related equipment consists of the following procedures which should be performed in the order listed e Changing hardware straps if necessary Physical installation of the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP Network diagnostic connection e Software configuration e DDS network LADS connection PSTN or switched 56 kbps network connection if a DBM is installed e DSU DTE connection e Operation verification This chapter tells you how to perform the procedures For electrical connection network diagnostic connection PSTN and switched 56 kbps network connection DDS network or LADS connection and DSU DTE connection information refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series
243. or printing the file is transported over the interactive channel to the host computer where it is directed to a text formatting program The resulting formatted file is transported to the remote printer CLUSTER CONTROLLER 3610 DSU WITH TDM TRIBUTARY 492 12888 01 Figure D 1 Configuration Scenario 1 Two Synchronous Channels D 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Configuration Options DSU For TDM scenario 1 use the Configuration Worksheet Rate Kbps 9 6 for TDM Mode and set the configuration options that TxClkSource DDS follow for both the control and tributary DSU TDMs Msg Clamp Enab AggrSwitch Disab e Setup Diag DSU MUX Funct TDM Share DevA Disab Diag Type NonD Share DevB Disab 2nd Ch bps 400 P1 2 FEPSh Disab Disr Type 3600e P3 4 FEPSh Disab Diag Cen P5 6 FEPSh Disab Position Cntrl for control Trib for tributary LinkConfig Pt Pt Disab Diag Conn CC for control N A for tributary TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const Elast Stor Disab DTE Port EIA232 RTS CTS Del 0 AntiStream Disab e Prti and Prt2 Prt3 through Prt6 N A e Gen PrtSp DSU Prtl 7 2 Prt2 2 4 Prt3 through Prt6 Disab Underspeed Prt2 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units TDM Scenario 2 Using Switched 56
244. ort sharing groups can be selected when using the MCMP option each consisting of two adjacent ports e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 FEP port sharing is a method of connecting an FEP to multiple control DSUs modems to broadcast the same message over the network and the shared port FEP data and control signal transmissions pass through the odd numbered port for broadcast onto a TDM channel and the even numbered port Elastic store per port The MCMP capability provides a transmit elastic store buffer on each port to support extended circuits Both digital and analog extensions are supported Switched carrier emulation In MCMP transmission switched carrier emulation for each channel is standard inbound toward the control DSU and optional outbound from the tributary DSU Async Terminal control A Model 3610 DSU with MCMP can be controlled from an async terminal When this feature is enabled the DSU is operated from the async terminal s menu and keyboard Dial backup Dial backup using the aggregate switching and extended bridge capabilities allow for multipoint service restoration When aggregate switching is enabled the DSU provides an internal aggregate data stream that includes diagnostics and framing on the EIA 232 D and V 35 interfaces of Port 1 The aggregate port the DTE port not selected under the General option set can then be connected to an extended bridge so the data can be sent to multiple Switched 56 DBMs eit
245. ppear on Port 1 3 The DBM V should be configured for V 13 Signaling 13 Signl enabled and for disruptive diagnostics Diag Type The tributary DSU should be configured for Transmit Carrier Select TxCarrSel set to Cntrl on the port that is to be backed up or 5 and the port speed cannot exceed 14 4 kbps Enabling FEP port sharing group 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 or 5 and 6 routes the application channel to the extended bridge unit and DBM Vs where it is routed to the tributary DSU s via the PSTN connections All other channels to the tributaries in backup are lost until the alarm is fixed and the MCMP circuit is restored When the DBM V has dialed the tributary DBM a Change Options command should be sent to the tributary DSU changing the Diagnostic Type Diag configuration option to Disruptive Disr CARRIER DDS 56 KBPS psu DBM PORT PRT SP PRT SP DSU DBM PORT SP PRT SP 1 96 96 ENABLED VIA FEP PORT SHARING psu DBM CROSSOVER PORT prt SP PRT SP CABLES A 1 9 6 9 6 PSTN 9 6 KBPS DSU DBM PORT PRT SP PRT SP 1 9 6 9 6 PSTN 9 6 KBPS 492 13004 01 TDM AND DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLES ARE USED WITH NON MODULAR UNITS Figure 4 24 Case 3 Backing Up One Complete Channel Full Backup 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 31 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Case 4 Backing up up to three channels at Using th
246. pport 1 9 Index 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60
247. py Copy From To L Pr Pri Pr3 4 Pre Pr2 Pri4 Pris Pre 494 12973 04 Options The Options Opts submenu allows you to save copy and or change configuration options A DBM V DBM S or DBM D can initiate a backup call using one of the following setup methods fully automatic backup partially automatic backup or manual backup To configure the DSU DBM for each of these setup methods using the DBM and Backup configuration option sets refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide When any part of the configuration is corrupted reset all configuration options using factory templates FacC FacT or FacB and reenter the network address Check the protocol mode if there is an NMS connection and verify the Backup Directory entries and the local telephone number Recall that Usrl and Usr2 are storage areas for user defined configuration option sets and that Usr3 is shipped from the factory loaded with the configuration option sets for a DBM V DBM S or DBM D Usr3 can be overwritten Refer to Appendix B of this guide for the default configuration options for a DBM V DBM S or DBM D should Usr3 be overwritten To learn how to edit change and save configuration options and for a complete description of all configuration options refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units M
248. quires the allocation of 2400 bps The sum of the allocated channel speeds aggregate bit rate must not exceed 48 kbps MCMP Overhead Composition Of the 56 kbps capacity bandwidth available to MCMP operation 48 kbps is allocated to user transmitted data and 8 kbps is overhead The MCMP overhead consists of a management channel to control the proprietary MCMP framing process and a nondisruptive in band secondary channel Management Channel During MCMP operation the control DSU is in constant communication with each tributary DSU via the management channel Since the management channel is embedded in the MCMP overhead it transmits information without disrupting user transmitted data When the MCMP capability is activated for the first time the control DSU with MCMP determines the roundtrip delay parameters that are critical to MCMP operation MCMP sends these parameters to the tributaries in the network to synchronize their transmissions Refer to MCMP Operation in this chapter After initialization the control DSU continues to monitor these delay parameters Upon detecting changes the control DSU sends corrected roundtrip delay parameters to the tributaries management channel is also used for framing where selection of an underspeed channel is not required This framing technique differs markedly from the in band framing scheme used by the TDM capability where framing bits may be implemented by reducing the dat
249. r a second X x Must set to group Disab Lowest Port Select lowest port number in the second X xi Ignored digital sharing group Ports in Gp Select number of ports to be in the second X x1 Ignored digital sharing group Port Cntrl Configure the second digital sharing group X x Ignored with or without contention P1 2 FEPSh Enable FEP port sharing group consisting X X Forced to of Ports 1 and 2 Disab P3 4 FEPSh Enable FEP port sharing group consisting X X Forced to of Ports 3 and 4 Disab P5 6 FEPSh Enable FEP port sharing group consisting X X Forced to of Ports 5 and 6 Disab MCMP Bckup Enable backup in either TDM or MCMP Ignored X Ignored mode 1 In MCMP mode a digital sharing group may also be formed by assigning the same channel to each port wanted in the group The host protocol must enforce the order of transmissions to avoid collisions If contention is desired and the digital sharing group consists of adjacent ports the digital sharing group can be recreated via configuration options Share Dev Lowest Port and of Ports in Gp The digital sharing group can then be configured for contention via Port 5 36 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Port Option Sets The Prt1 through Prt6 selections allow configuration options to be set on a per port basis for TDM MCMP Bridge mode In TDM or MCMP mode the Prt1 through Prt6 selections are available In Bridge mode the Prt2 through Prt6 selections
250. r xa e 1 9 Overview The COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units DSUs Models 3610 and 3611 support communication between computers and other data processing devices by providing connections to digital transmission facilities The 3600 Series DSUs can be optioned with hardware to support the following capabilities e Dial backup point to point and multipoint LPDA 2 Link Problem Determination Aid Release 2 interoperability e Time Division Multiplexing TDM e Multichannel Multipoint MCMP e Digital bridge The time division multiplexing multichannel multipoint digital bridge and multipoint backup capabilities are discussed in this applications guide LPDA interoperability as it applies to applications requiring installation of the TDM or MCMP option is also discussed in this guide The time division multiplexer TDM option an additional circuit card supports time division multiplexing and digital sharing for up to six ports It can serve as a digital bridge for multipoint dial backup and multipoint local area data set LADS operation The multichannel multipoint MCMP option is a circuit card that provides multipoint TDM capability The MCMP capability allows up to six independent application programs to share one 56 kbps multipoint circuit Channel speeds can range from 1 2 to 48 kilobits per second kbps and the sum of the speeds must be less than or equal to 48 kbps The TDM c
251. ransmit Receive Test commands The DSU CSU and Line Status test monitors both the PSTN and DDS facilities and reports whether the circuit is in dial backup or communicating over the DDS line FAILURE 492 12856 02 Figure 4 42 Dial Backup with LPDA 2 Configuration 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 55 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Multipoint Dial Backup The 3600 Series DSUs continue to support the DSU CSU and Line Status command and the Transmit Receive Test during a multipoint dial backup The Call Out and Disconnect commands are not supported in multipoint dial backup During a full or partial multipoint dial backup LPDA 2 commands continue to operate between the control and tributary DSU DBM although the digital bridge and DBM Vs are transparent to this operation During backup the control DSU reports only DDS line quality while the tributary DSUs report the DDS and PSTN line quality just as in point to point backup Figure 4 43 Multiplexing with TDM or MCMP The 3600 Series DSUs equipped with TDM or MCMP accommodate LPDA 2 monitoring on Port 1 NetView treats the TDM as a single point to point circuit and the MCMP as a single multipoint circuit CARRIER 050 NETVIEW HOST DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE DIGITAL BRIDGE For TDM LPDA 2 commands issued from NetView only affect Port 1 when nondisruptive diagnostics are used they affect all ports when disrupti
252. rdware two to six drops e One Model 3611 DSU configured as a control e One TDM or MCMP circuit card configured as a digital bridge e One Model 3611 DSU per drop at the digital bridge site The 3611 DSUs do not need to be adjacent to the TDM or MCMP circuit card or even in the same carrier as the or If the bridged LADS network is operating at a speed greater than 19 2 kbps the distance between the DSUs and the digital bridge should not exceed one digital bridge interface cable e Digital bridge interface cabling between the digital bridge ports and the DSUs Up to six tributary DSUs can be supported via one central site bridge Figure 4 38 The extended bridges can be added to extend bridging capability as explained in the Digital Bridge section of this chapter to support up to 31 tributary DSUs The digital bridge and DSUs linked via the crossover cable to the bridge Figure 4 38 are dedicated to a single control DSU Digital bridging of the DTE input output signals on Port 1 of the control DSU is performed by the TDM or MCMP circuit card which broadcasts Port 1 DTE data to the central site DSUs and accepts data from them For non modular Model 3611 2505 with the digital bridge capability a digital bridge interface cable attaches to the multiport connector on the TDM or MCMP circuit card to provide fan out cabling to five individual 25 pin EIA 232 connectors For modular Model 3611 0505 Model
253. re 4 28 shows the multipoint tributary DSUs as 3610 DSUs DBMs but tributaries can also be 3611 DSUs DBMs One dial backup call is required per failed drop Partial backup on multipoint DDS circuits is possible when not all drops are out of service as long as the speed of the DDS line and the dial backup modules are matched and the digital bridge rate is set to DSU In partial backup the tributaries not affected by the failure continue to communicate with the control DSU through the DDS facility and each tributary affected by the failure communicates with the control DSU through a backup connection Full backup to each tributary on multipoint circuits is necessary when the speed of the DDS line and the dial backup modules cannot be matched or when the DDS facility backbone goes out of service In full backup the DDS facility is dropped and each tributary DSU communicates with the control DSU through a backup connection A partial backup application is shown in Figure 4 31 Each pair of communicating DBMs includes central site carrier mounted dial backup module DBM V DBM S or DBM D and a remote site childboard DBM The DBM V DBM S DBM D is dial backup module that fits into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier The DBM can be addressed by an NMS an async terminal or the SDCP can accept and forward diagnostic messages and can carry out commands essential to multipoint dial backup operation The digital bridge and DBM
254. re 4 39 the Bridge Rate configuration option must be set to ZDSU Configuration options are set via the DCP as discussed in CARRIER V 35 OR CONTROLLING FElA 232 DTE Chapter 5 the Bridge Rate configuration option is discussed in the MUX Configuration Options section of Chapter 5 The control DSU is configured for internal timing unless the controlling DTE provides the timing source in which case the DSU is configured for external timing Each tributary DSU on the LADS multipoint network is configured for received timing The DSUs connected to the bridge are configured for external timing and should have their elastic stores enabled DTE 1 IE AGGREGATE DATA PATH TRIBUTARY DTE2 DIGITAL BRIDGE INTERFACE CABLE TRIBUTARY 3 P gt dei je TRIBUTARY 4 TRIBUTARY DTE 5 _ TRIBUTARY DTE 6 sssi DIGITAL BRIDGE 492 12867 01 4 WIRE NONLOADED METALLIC PAIRS CROSSOVER CABLES ARE USED WITH MODULAR UNITS Figure 4 39 Bridged LADS Architecture and Signal Flow 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 51 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Digital Bridge DSU Interface Figure 4 40 shows the interconnections between a digital bridge port and a central site 3600 Series DSU Since both the digital bridge port and the DSU provide a DCE interface a special crossover ca
255. re folded 40 position header from the DSU and fold the TDM or MCMP flat cable out over the side of the expanded base Remove the two thread cutting screws at the front corners and the screw with captive lock washer at the rear corner of the DSU Remove the DSU from the existing base Carefully lift the DSU up until its connectors are free of the rear panel Set the DSU on a clean ESD anti static workpad Write the serial number from the existing base onto the new TDM or MCMP expanded base using indelible ink see Figure 2 3 Discard the existing base and rear panel Installing a TDM Flex or MCMP Flex To change the Flex interface S1 switch refer to the Changing the Flex Interface Switch section of this chapter To complete the TDM Flex or MCMP Flex installation refer to Figure 2 4 while following this procedure p Procedure 1 Fold the TDM or MCMP flat cable over the side of the new expanded base Position the DSU over the new expanded base Secure the DSU to the expanded base using the two 4 thread cutting screws at the front corners and the 4 screw with captive lock washer at the rear corner make sure this screw is tightened Connect the TDM or MCMP flat cable s pre folded 40 position header to the DSU Make sure the pins are correctly aligned with the connector one pin hole on the connector is blocked Reconnect the keypad flat cable by inserting the cable into its connector as far as it wi
256. res the allocation of 2400 bps When operating with the Async Sync configuration option enabled a single port point to point circuit can operate using nondisruptive diagnostics The control DSU s port speed and the tributary DTE port speeds must be set to the same rate with the tributary DSUs configured as a single port sharing group Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Model 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide for the additional single port async sync information In Band Framing and Underspeed Channel For proper operation the receiving TDM must be in synchronization with the transmitting TDM To ensure synchronization the transmitting TDM adds an extra bit to each TDM frame called a framing bit to create an identifiable pattern of bits over multiple frames A frame is a block of data that is transmitted as a unit Thus to synchronize the receiving TDM compares the incoming bit of each frame position to the expected pattern If the pattern does not match successive bit positions are searched until the pattern persists over multiple frames When two or more channels are required a 3600 Series DSU operating in TDM mode uses a framing scheme called in band framing IBF When the combined data rate of the communicating DTE is less than the data rate of the DDS line the framing bits are inserted into the idle unused capacity When the combined data rate is equal to the rate of the DDS line framing bits ar
257. rface switch 2 6 keys shaded 5 2 LADS bridge operation 4 50 bridged L49 connection distances 4 48 operation point to point 4 49 lamp test LCD power up 2 83 8 leads external LEDs 5 45 line speeds 1 2 1 444 23 link problem determination aid 1 5 segment level level Index 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Index list poll acquiring 5 41 adding to local loopback 5 17 menu subbranches 5 7 locations pin non modular connector circuit card loopback 5 17 bilateral 5 20 5 23 5 24 digital 5 20 addressing 4 54 SNA diagnostic interface configuration dial backup monitoring digital sharing MCMP circuit 4 61 circuit 4 60 multiplexing 4 57 TDM 4 57 management channel framing 4 23 manual restoration DDS MCMP 4 54 addressable devices 1 4 aggregated switched backup applications 4 25 architecture assembling disassembling 2 5 backup 4 28 FEP port sharing switched 56 DBM bandwidth circuit LPDA 2 monitoring digital sharing configuration scenarios D 25 digital sharing 4 26 4 27 faceplate FEP port sharing 4 27 D 25 D 26 configuration D 30 dial backup active D 31 flex 2 port 6 port independent channels initialization 4 25 teroperability 1 5 mode multichannel multipoint multiple DTEs multiplexing 4 56 4 57
258. rform the Device Test again If the Device Test fails again call your service representative for assistance 2 16 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation OVERVIEW SET 3 1 Non Modular DSU witha TDM of MOMP trigo 3 2 Modular DSU with a or 3 2 DBM VS DBM SS DBM DS eee eme RR REA EA RIA 3 2 MCI 3 3 Software aad ba baa ya 3 4 dad alah RR EHE UC Sp CERE 3 4 NMS PETER 3 4 3 5 Adding or MCMP to an Installed Model 3611 DSU 3 6 Installing a Non Modular TDM or 3 7 Power DD ROUND t hem Regreso eres ite ep 3 8 Installing Modular r eredi eie 3 10 Removing a TDM or MCMP from an Installed Model 3611 DSU 3 13 Overview The Model 3611 DSU TDM or DSU MCMP is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies operating power and provides interfaces for connecting to the DDS and if required analog networks Up to 16 DSUs can be installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A Model 3611 DSU modular or non modular is delivered with default strap settings and factory installed software
259. ributary AutoAnswer Enab Call Setup Pswrd RxPwd enter received password TxPwd enter transmit password Primary Core No for control and tributary DTRCallCon N A for control Disab for tributary Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Control FrcOn Bkup Auto Bckup N A for control Enab for tributary Backup Dir N A for control enter Dir number 1 to 10 for tributary BckupOnCMI N A for control Enab for tributary AutoRestor N A for control Enab for tributary NtwkTimOut N A for control enter amount of time for tributary RestorTimOut N A for control enter amount of time for tributary TriesTimOut N A for control enter amount of time for tributary D 32 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Set configuration options for automatic partial backup using the DSU DBM TDM as follows Configuration Worksheet for TDM Mode MUX Setup MUX Funct TDM Share DevA Disab Share DevB Disab P1 2 FEPSh Enab P3 4 FEPSh Enab P5 6 FEPSh Disab Prti and Prt3 Prt5 N A AsyncSync Disab TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Cntrl PCC Buffer Enab for control Disab for tributary Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 Prt2 and Prt4 Prt6 N A AsyncSync Disab RTS Cntrl DTE TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab AntiStream Disab PrtSp DSU 7 2 Prt2 7 2 Prt3 4 8 Prt4 4 8 Prt5 and Prt6 Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 40
260. ridge with configuration option Bridge Rate set to DSU the following screen is displayed DBM Inactiv Brdg A Bkup CJ CJ Test Branch The Test branch provides extensive testing capabilities for the DSU DDS circuit DBM and backup circuit For a DSU that is performing a multiplexing function such as rate adaption nondisruptive diagnostics TDM or MCMB you can request tests on individual ports or on the aggregate data path Local Loopback LL and End to End EE tests however can only be run on the aggregate data path Tests that are performed on the aggregate data stream test the entire bandwidth Therefore during aggregate tests in band secondary channel transport communication is lost For tests such as aggregate Digital Loopback DL the control DSU reports a No Response or a TribTimOut alarm for downstream devices TOP LEVEL MENU Abort Devic DT EE BERT Lamp Start Start Start Subn Selective Port Port Select Select Address Address Run Blocks LL DTE DL RL Tim Port Port Port Select Select Select Displ Address 493 12972 02 When DSU receives test request from the remote DSU it aborts any locally initiated test in progress point to point control or tributary DSU or a multipoint control DSU can run all of the tests on the Test menu A multipoint tributary cannot run any remote tests or a BERT Digital
261. ring asss Ibo a PRU e E eas 4 26 MCMP swith BEP Port SBarmng Ur rete aded Cad Rs 4 27 Backup dt erie tse ree sees e eR e 4 28 DUI BITS oy esa Bussa 4 35 Dispnostic Consideran nesihet e epe entente es 4 38 Multipoint u Yr pre ENT ER ee X E ee eva 4 38 Multipoint Backup Addressing re mcer mee ee ee de e Hab ees 4 40 Multipomt Backup Aechiteetule ivy mere E uy kamaq E ES RE eL UR 4 42 Central Site DBM Vs DBM SSs DBM DS Ea 6 eh 4 45 DBM V DBM S DBM D Dial on Capability 4 46 Digital Bridge DBM V DBM S DBM D Interface 4 46 Digital Bridge DBM V DBM S DBM D Switched LSD Operation 4 46 Tributary DSU Considerations s E a ee E a 4 46 Setup DSU Rate Equals DBM Rate CR Renee ere 4 46 Automate DDS Restoran essare ini a rb ere Ea dod eh E eei ben tet ds 4 47 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Setup DBM Rate Less Than DSU Rate Manual DDS Restoration LADS Operation 1mm reser Rye mee Poiut to Pomt LADS 22222220222 ter 22 Bridged LADS
262. ring and Multiple DTEs When LPDA 2 monitoring is used with digital sharing a 3 Extended Circuit For configurations having feature available with the TDM or MCMP extended circuits the tributary DSU in the option the DTE connected to the digital sharing primary circuit is set to 253 Address 253 FD group must use consecutive PU addresses see hex is the broadcast LPDA 2 address Figures 4 46 and 4 47 in the Digital Sharing section in this chapter The digital sharing group 4 TDM and MCMP Where multiple DTEs are must start with Port 1 for the DSU to support attached to a DSU optioned with TDM or LPDA 2 monitoring on each port of the the tributary DSU is set to the PU address of the digital sharing group The LPDA 2 address is set attached terminal device at Port 1 see to the lowest PU address The DTE with the Figures 4 44 and 4 45 in the Multiplexing with lowest PU address is then connected to Port 1 The TDM or MCMP section The SNA Diagnostic DTE with the next consecutive PU address is Interface option passes LPDA 2 commands via connected to Port 2 and so on From the NetView Port 1 of the TDM or MCMP operator s perspective the digital sharing feature appears as a unique DSU connected to each DTE All ports in a digital sharing group operate at the same speed and all receive the same data The Sharing Device A Share Dev A configuration option is used to create the digital sharing group 4 54 March 1999 3610 A2
263. rk and elastic stores in the digital bridge buffer any timing differences between the DBMs and the DDS network After all calls have been completed full restoration is accomplished at 9600 bps CARRIER 9600 BPS 3 141 DIGITAL BRIDGE CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg It is not likely that backup can be accomplished before the network has timed out and the affected tributaries have been taken off the host s active list However if they placed on an FEP s slow poll list they will be placed back on the active list as soon as backup has been completed they can then respond to polls once again If dropped from the poll list completely you will have to place the remote DTEs back onto the FEP s poll list During the backup session each pair of communicating DBMs the DBM V and its tributary DBM and the DDS network are active on the bridge When the DDS network is restored each tributary DSU drops its network alarm After the 5 minute restoration interval has elapsed the DSU switches back to the DDS network and the remote DTE then receives polls from the host over the DDS network Remote DTE responses are also sent back over the DDS network As each tributary disconnects its DBM its DBM V switches out of Data mode becoming inactive on the bridge Thus restoration to the DDS network is automatic and generally nondisruptive Disruptions should only occur if the control and tributary are communicating
264. rly Digital Loopback is session disruptive when the DBM is in Dial Backup mode and is nondisruptive when it is in Standby mode The test DTE PORT 1 INTERFACE PORT 2 PORT 3 DIE PORT 4 INTERFACE PORTE PORT 6 requires a dialed connection to another DBM DTE connections to the DBMs are not required Digital Loopback DL can be initiated by e Selecting DL from the Lpbk submenu in the Test branch menu e Receiving a V 54 loopback pattern Enable configuration options V 54 Lpbk V 54 Loopback and RespondRDL Respond to Remote Digital Loopback A Digital Loopback may not be initiated from a remote multipoint device NOTE If the Bilat Lpbk Bilateral Loopback configuration option is enabled requesting a Digital Loopback automatically initiates a DTE Loopback as well TRANSMITTER BASIC MODE OR NETWORK AGGR LOOPBACK INTERFACE RECEIVER n 492 12875 01 Figure 5 7 Digital Loopback 5 20 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Selecting Aggr Aggregate loops back the user transmitted data and the secondary channel transport data 1f nondisruptive diagnostics are in effect This disrupts secondary channel transport communications Selecting Prt1 Port 1 causes the loopback to occur at a point where the secondary channel transport has already been extracted from the user transmitted data so only the user transmitted data is looped back Secondary channel communications are pr
265. rt a small pointed tool into position 1 of Switch S1 and carefully flip the switch in the direction of the circuit card label identifying the setting To select EIA push switch to EIA Off direction To select V 35 push switch to V 35 ON direction Reinstall the DSU circuit card securing it to the base with the three screws refer to Figure 2 4 Reconnect the LCD keypad and TDM MCMP flat cables Replace the cover over the expanded base carefully aligning the rear panel and four snap tabs over their corresponding slots Press the cover and base together until all four tabs snap into place 494 14450 Figure 2 5 Changing TDM Flex or MCMP Flex Interface Compatibility 2 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation Changing the DSD Option Card TDM DSD or MCMP DSD is shipped from the factory with the option card set to E A 232 The following procedure tells you how to change this setting to V 35 or back to EIA 232 NOTE If the unit has already been installed make sure that the unit is disconnected from its power source before changing the option card gt Procedure 1 Gently work the option card free of its connector refer to Figure 2 6 OPTION CARD LED 2 YELLOW V 35 Turn the card around and re insert the option card so that from the rear the option card reads THIS SIDE FACES REAR FOR V 35 Reinstall the DSU circuit card
266. rue for the tributary DSU DBMs Configuration Options Set the control DSU MCMP with Switched 56 DBM configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for MCMP Mode e Setup MUX Funct MCMP Share DevA Disab Share DevB Disab P1 2 FEPSh Disab P3 4 FEP Sh Disab P5 6 FEP Sh Disa MCMP Bckup MCMP for tributaries Prti through Prt3 Prt4 through Prt6 N A AsyncSync Disab TxCarrSel Const RxCarrSel Const PrtSp DSU Prt1 19 2 for control N A for tributary Prt2 4 8 for control N A for tributary Prt3 4 8 for control N A for tributary Prt4 through Prt6 Disab for control N A for tributary e PrtSp Chan Prtl Prt2 B Prt3 C Prt4 None for control C for top tributary None for bottom tributaries Prt5 and Prt6 None e DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS AggrSwitch Enab AgSw Timing Aggr Diag DSU Diag Type NonD Disr Type Br56 D 28 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Diag Gen Position Cntrl for control Trib for tributary LinkConfig M Pt e Gen DTE Port EIA232 RTS Control FrcOn e Bkup Auto Bckup N A for control Disab for tributary AutoRestor N A for control Disab for tributary Set the extended bridge configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct EBrdg Bridge Rate 56 Brdg Timing Auto Lowest Porti 2 Ports in Gp 2 Port Cntrl Host
267. s Chapter 6 in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator 5 Guide Digital Bridge DBM V DBM S DBM D Interface Since both the digital bridge port and the DBM provide a DCE interface a digital bridge interface or crossover cable is used to complete the communication path refer back to Figure 4 28 The digital bridge broadcasts data from the controlling DTE to all ports in the digital sharing group even if the DBMs connected to the ports are not in Dial Backup mode with an active call the data is simply ignored by the DBMs When a call has been established between a central site DBM and a remote DBM the DBM V DBM S or DBM D enters Dial Backup mode accepts data from the digital bridge port then transmits data over the backup line and through the remote DBM to its associated DTE Digital Bridge DBM V DBM S DBM D Switched LSD Operation Some DTEs require the LSD interface to be ON when data is present and Off when no data is present In this case the connected and associated tributary DBMs must be configured to enable the V 13 feature However most DTEs that would be connected to Port 1 do not utilize the LSD interface lead In this case the connecting DBMs are not required to have the V 13 feature enabled Tributary DSU Considerations In multipoint backup the firmware version of the tributary DSU DBM in a multipoint circuit determines the features available It is recommend
268. s Fail or Abrt These tests take about 20 seconds to complete Abrt indicates that the Device Test was aborted because a network loopback was in progress during the power up procedure When a TDM or MCMP is installed MUX is displayed as Pass or Fail 2 8 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation WITHOUT or OPTION FRONT BEZEL WALL MOUNT AC TRANSFORMER TABLE TOP AC TRANSFORMER WITH AS V 35 INTERFACE LOW VOLTAGE PORT 1 ACPOWERIN INTERFACE DDS NETWORK EIA 232 D V 24 INTERFACE DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE INTERFACE PORT 1 M PORT 2 WALL MOUNT TRANSEORMER B PORT 3 PORT 4 NOTE PORTS ADDITIONAL EIA 232 INTERFACES PORT NUMBERS 2 6 TABLE TOP AC TRANSFORMER WITH TDM or MCMP OPTION 496 13015 05 Figure 2 7 Model 3610 DSU with TDM or MCMP 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 9 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units If the DSU DBM or MCMP fails the power up test gt Procedure Reinstall the factory configuration options use the FacT configuration for a tributary or FacC for a control 2 Confirm the installed hardware options DBM TDM or 3 Re execute the Device Test Press 2 key to return to the top level menu then select Local Test DSU Devic If the test passes continue with the installation
269. s LED will flash each time a diagnostic poll or response is received 5 When or is installed will always appear as ON for Port 1 Refer to the DTE Status display on the DCP to determine the state of the DTR lead 5 6 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Menu Structure Local Remote Menu Subbranches The menu tree is accessed via the DCP SDCP for a The Local branch menu has five subbranches and the DBM V DBM S or DBM D and is shown in Remote branch menu has four Appendix A The ES that ap P car in the menu tree e The Status Stat branch reports the health and depend upon the DSU s function within the network status of the DSU and its options the DTE control or tributary the hardware op spe that are interface the DSU s identification information the installed DEM TDM or MCMP LPDA and the status of the connected DTE s EIA 232 and V 35 DSU s mode of operation interfaces and if there is a dialed PSTN A Model 3610 DSU TDM or DSU MCMP comes connection the quality of the PSTN circuit from the factory configured as a tributary while a Backup Bckup branch controls the operation Model 3611 DSU TDM or DSU MCMP comes of the dial backup feature Through this branch the configured as a control In addition a DSU TDM comes the digital bridge or aggregate switch is activated or configured for TDM mode while a DSU MCMP comes deactivated This branch can only be access
270. s of 150 300 600 1200 and 1800 bps are supported The word size is 6 to 10 bits and one or two stop bits can be specified Digital sharing Two groups of consecutive ports can be formed to share the same channel ports in a digital sharing group operate at the same speed and all receive the same data When configured for DSD port contention only one port at a time is allowed to send FEP port sharing FEP port sharing is a method of connecting a front end processor FEP to multiple control DSUs modems to broadcast the same message over the network and the shared port Up to three separate FEP port sharing groups can be selected Each group consists of two adjacent ports e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 FEP data and control signal transmissions pass through the odd numbered port for broadcast onto a TDM channel and the even numbered port Elastic store per port The TDM capability provides a transmit elastic store buffer for each port to support extended circuits Both digital and analog extensions are supported Switched carrier emulation In TDM transmission switched carrier emulation for each port is optional for both the inbound toward the control DSU and outbound from the tributary DSU directions Digital bridge The TDM can be configured to perform a digital bridge function The digital bridge capability can support many applications including dedicated multipoint dial backup and multipoint LADS oper
271. s timing is still provided by the DDS network and elastic stores in the digital bridge buffer any timing differences between the DBMs and the DDS network After all calls have been completed full restoration is accomplished at 9600 bps It is not likely that backup can be accomplished before the network has timed out and the affected tributaries have been taken off the host s active list However if they are placed on an FEP s slow poll list they will be placed back on the active list as soon as backup has been completed they can then respond to polls once again If dropped from the poll list completely you will have to place the remote DTEs back onto the FEP s poll list D 14 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios CARRIER DDS 9600 BPS FEP CENTRAL SITE ww ff BRIDGE AND ASSOCIATED DBM Vs DBM a CROSSOVER lt CABLES A CROSSOVER CABLES EXTENDED BRIDGE AND ASSOCIATED DBM Vs TRIBUTARY DTE 1 TRIBUTARY DTE 2 TRIBUTARY DTE 3 TRIBUTARY DTE 4 TRIBUTARY DTE 5 TRIBUTARY DTE 6 TRIBUTARY DTE 7 492 12892 02 CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg Figure D 7 Extended Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Dial Backup Not Active 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 15 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units NETWORK FAILURE CARRIER DDS y por 9600 BPS n FEP SU TRIBUTARY
272. s are in Local Loopback Use the DTE Loopback command to loop back only one port Command Complete appears at the loopback conclusion NOTE When Nondisruptive Diagnostics is enabled Diag Type NonD Local Loopback disrupts secondary channel transport communications For a control DSU the DSU may report No Response or Tributary Time out during the test To access Local Loopback from the top level menu make the following selections Local Fl e Test e DSU e pbk LL Local Loopback can also be initiated by the DTE attached to Port 1 by raising Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D V 24 interface or Pin L of the V 35 interface provided the Local Loopback by DTE configuration option is enabled Results Data transmitted to the DSU is returned to the DTE DSU Local Lpbk A Command A Le gt NOTE During Local Loopback the DSU uses internal timing This may be a problem for extended circuit applications In this case execute a DTE Loopback instead of a Local Loopback 5 18 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations DTE Loopback Results DTE Loopback DTE loops back the data path at the The test result is a message telling you whether or not DTE DCE interface on a per port basis without affecting the loopback executed successfully the operation of the remaining ports Figure 5 6 A message appears regarding successful loopback execution
273. s as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct CBrdg Bridge Rate ZDSU Brdg Timing Int Share DevA Enab Lowest Port DCE Ports in Gp 6 Share DevB Disab Prt2 through Prt6 RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab TxElastStor Disab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Mixed 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type 3600 Diag Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt Trib TimOut enter amount of time M Pt SymPrt Disab e Gen DTE Port EIA232 D 18 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios Set the extended bridge configuration options as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct EBrdg Bridge Rate 9 6 Brdg Timing Prt1 Share DevA Enab Lowest Port 2 Ports in Gp 3 Port Cntrl Host Share DevB Disab Prt2 through Prt4 Prt5 and Prt6 N A RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 9 6 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab TxElastStor Disab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type Disr Disr Type 3600e Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt e Gen DTE Port EIA232 Network Management Controlled Full Backup Using an Extended Bridge The assumed configuration for backup Figure D 10 shows when dial backup is not active while Figure D 11 show
274. s though there is no TDM or MCMP installed in the DSU The Configuration Confg branch provides the ability to customize DSU and DBM software When a TDM or MCMP is installed and enabled the configuration options to enter and change CBrdg and EBrdg selections permit the TDM or MCMP telephone numbers if a DBM is installed to to operate in Bridge mode For MCMP or Bridge change the DSU network address and to specify mode a port number Prt through Prt6 must be the protocol used by a connected NMS For a specified before issuing some commands The results DSU TDM or DSU MCMP the mode of operation returned by the DSU may vary depending upon the Bridge or Basic is selected and operating mode MUX Funct configuration option and the TDM or MCMP port and port speed the port selected configuration options are also set using this branch SNA Diagnostic Interface option LPDA on the menu tree for multipoint applications is discussed in this guide Refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide for point to point applications and the configuration options unique to those SNA Diagnostic Interface LPDA 2 applications 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 5 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units The Control Ctrl branch provides the ability to display and change external leads enable or d
275. s when dial backup is active that is controlled by an NMS using an extended bridge is as follows e Network is a 7 drop DDS multipoint network operating at 56 kbps e Full backup of all tributaries with the digital bridge operating at 14 4 kbps 18 required with outage of any tributary e The control and tributary DSUs are configured for nondisruptive diagnostics with a 400 bps in band secondary channel transport speed e Seven central site DBM Vs are dedicated to the control DSU and are connected to its digital bridge e Tributary DBMs are configured for 14 4 kbps operation LSD emulation 13 switched carrier operation no fallback and auto answer with password security Central site DBM Vs are configured for 14 4 kbps operation no fallback and outgoing call setup with password security Digital bridge consists of a central site bridge and an extended bridge working in tandem the central site bridge has Bridge Rate set to 14 4 kbps has Ports 2 through 6 active and configured for contention and takes its timing from the DDS system clock the extended bridge has Bridge Rate set to 14 4 kbps has Ports 2 through 4 active and configured for contention and takes its timing from the external timing on FEP can accept a change in speed from 56 kbps to 14 4 kbps e When a failure occurs the backbone DDS network all of the drops are affected The control DSU reports a Facility Alarm and a Tribu
276. sable devices MCMP capability supports up to 40 tributary DSUs or 20 tributary DSUs with DBMs each equipped with an circuit card e Line speeds The MCMP capability operates at 56 kbps full duplex The total usable bandwidth for the port is an aggregate bit rate of up to 48 kbps e Channel speeds Speeds of the individual channels be arbitrarily set to 1 2 2 4 4 8 7 2 9 6 12 14 4 16 8 19 2 38 4 or 48 kbps full duplex The sum of the channel speeds cannot exceed 48 kbps Asynchronous operation Although the DSU provides synchronous transmission through the DDS network any of the channels ports can be configured for asynchronous operation The MCMP capability provides the asynchronous to synchronous conversion on these channels The channel speed choices are the same as those for synchronous operation The word size can range from 6 to 10 bits and one or two stop bits can be specified Asynchronous data rates of 150 300 600 1200 and 1800 bps are also supported Digital sharing Up to three digital sharing groups can be formed at each tributary site by assigning channels to more than one port Since all ports in a digital sharing group share the same channel all ports operate at the same speed and all receive the same data With MCMP capability digital sharing and multiplexing can be in effect simultaneously at any of the tributary sites FEP port sharing Up to three separate FEP p
277. sc Disconnect dialed link Idle mode Dial Switch data to dialed link Dial Backup mode Dial Backup DrBU Disconnect dialed link and switch to DDS Idle mode Switch data to DDS Standby mode Aggregate Switch To learn how to enable disable or place the DBM in When AggrSwitch Aggregate Switch is enabled the backup commands have a different effect e Bkup is used to initiate a point to point backup or a full multipoint backup The DSU disconnects from the DDS line and reverts to the timing source specified by the AgSw Timing Aggregate Switch Timing configuration option Do not initiate this command for a partial multipoint backup For multipoint applications data is automatically bridged to the aggregate port as well as the DDS line when the AggrSwitch configuration option is enabled e DrBU is used to terminate a point to point or full multipoint backup The DSU resumes transmission on the DDS line The DSU timing is specified by the DSU TxClkSource configuration option The DBM s mode determines the menu that appears when Bckup is selected With the addition of the TDM or MCMP circuit card the DCP operation remains unchanged while in Idle mode for the following Enabling disabling or placing the DBM in Dial Backup or Standby mode Disconnecting the dial connection switching data to the dial connection and switching to the DDS circuit Dial Backup or Standby mode while in Idle mode as well as how to
278. securing it to the base with the three screws refer to Figure 2 4 Reconnect the LCD keypad and TDM MCMP flat cables For the TDM MCMP flat cable make sure the flat cable ferrite choke is properly positioned on the edge between the DSU and the TDM MCMP circuit card Replace the cover over the expanded base carefully aligning the rear panel and four snap tabs over their corresponding slots Press the cover and base together until all four tabs snap into place 496 13845 02 Figure 2 6 Changing TDM DSD or MCMP DSD Interface Compatibility 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Electrical Connection CAUTION The power cord with ac transformer contains a 3 wire grounding type plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Grounding of the unit is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug by modifying it or by using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for earth ground If the power Source does not provide a ground connection consult an electrician to determine another method of grounding the unit before proceeding with the installation To power up the DSU gt Procedure 1 Use non switched 3 prong grounded wall outlet capable of supplying the specified voltage and current Label the circuit breaker that protects t
279. switches the connection from the DDS line to the bridge and causes the digital bridge to switch to the timing that is stored in the Brdg Timing configuration option TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE DIGITAL BRIDGE BRIDGE RATE 12 0 494 12857 02 Figure 4 36 Central Site Bridging Architecture 56 kbps Inactive Digital Bridge 4 44 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation CARRIER CONTROLLING DTE DDS 56 KBPS AGGREGATE DATA PATH 14 4 KBPS 14 4 KBPS 14 4 KBPS TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE DIGITAL BRIDGE BRIDGE RATE 14 4 KBPS 494 12858 02 Figure 4 37 Central Site Bridging Architecture 56 kbps Active Digital Bridge Central Site DBM Vs DBM Ss DBM Ds At the central site a DBM is required for each drop to be backed up A DBM V may be used for V 32 backup For switched 56 kbps backup DBM S is used for 4 wire access and a DBM D is used for 2 wire access to the switched 56 kbps digital service These DBMs require one slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier As an alternative to using a DBM V DBM S or DBM D a DSU DBM with its Primary Core configuration option enabled can be used for backup The carrier is controlled by the same network management systems that control the Model 3611 DSU DBMs have the same diagnostic capabilities and Call Setup security procedures as DBMs at the tributary location The DBM
280. t in the carrier Orient the modular TDM or MCMP circuit card in the same manner to the immediate right of the modular DSU circuit card Keeping the modular circuit cards DSU and TDM or perpendicular to the work surface move the circuit cards closer to one another ensuring that their bottom edges are flat against the work surface Look between the circuit cards to guide the double ended pin header with an integral ferrite choke into its mating connector on the modular TDM or At the same time ensure that the snaplock posts are aligned with their mating holes in the modular TDM or MCMP Make sure that the double ended pin headers are properly aligned Then snap the snaplock posts into the modular TDM or Use the remaining four Phillips head screws and flat washers to secure the standoff posts to the modular TDM or MCMP 10 12 13 14 At the front of the carrier make sure that both the top and bottom edges of the modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP circuit cards are correctly aligned in their respective circuit card guides Then slide the modular DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit into the carrier and press the faceplate latches on both circuit card faceplates to secure the circuit cards into the connector module Rotate the circuit pack lock on the modular DSU circuit card faceplate back into the closed position and tighten the screw Figure 3 5 Install the black banded end of the double ended pin
281. tary Time out alarm for each tributary DSU and DBM e You have either a System Controller or a COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS Workstation 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 19 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units CARRIER SDU 55600 FEP DSU NMS OR ASYNC TERMINAL DDS 56000 BPS TRIBUTARY 55600 DTE BPS 1 S TRIBUTARY DTE 2 TRIBUTARY DTE 3 CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE AND ASSOCIATED DBM Vs TRIBUTARY DTE 4 TRIBUTARY DTE 5 TRIBUTARY DTE 6 DIGITAL BRIDGE TRIBUTARY DTE 7 S amp amp id S CROSSOVER CABLES EXTENDED BRIDGE AND ASSOCIATED DBM Vs 494 12897 04 CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg EXTENDED BRIDGE EBrdg _ EHI Figure 0 10 NMS Controlled Full Backup Configuration Dial Backup Not Active D 20 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Configuration Scenarios CARRIER SDU NETWORK FAILURE DDS 56000 BPS DSU TRIBUTARY i OF JU DIGITAL NMS OR ASYNC TERMINAL PSTN 14400 BPS TRIBUTARY DTE DBM 2 YU C ii CROSSOVER PSTN CABLES lt 14400 BPS ou ff TRIBUTARY DTE DBM 3 iC H T DBM V PSTN 2 14400 BPS TRIBUTARY DBM ES PSTN J C Tj 14400 BPS wu f TRIBUTARY DTE DBM 5 U 1j ww ff TRIBUTARY DTE PSTN DBM 6 14400 BPS DIGITAL rum ww ff TRIBUTARY DTE RAPAE 14400 BPS DBM 7 T CROSSOVER C
282. td 2 iag Conn CC nab Disabl RxElasStor Enab Disab Link Delay 05 15 25 5s 10s 20s 50s Call Setup None Pswrd Cllbk Alarm LL by DTE Enab Disab Network Delay 0s 1s 2s 5s 10s 20s 50s RxPwd Chang RL by DTE Enab Disab Packet Delay 0s 1s 2s 5s TxPwd Chang Bilat Lpbk Enab Disab M Pt SymPrt Enab Disab V 13 Signi Enab Disab Fast Sel Enab Disab Ext Leads ExtLd Rate RPower ae Enabj Disal Dial Test Enab Disab CCN by EL Enab Disab Yes DTR Alarm Enab Disab ChMd Options DtrCallCon Origtt Ansr Disab Mode ADp DMC SW Vers 3 22 4 41 Normal AsyncSync Enab Disab EchoCancel Enab Disab Ri te 2 wire 4 wire Hardware Straps Value AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 emote wire 1 DDD InterfaceT Permissive Programmable Stop Bits 1 2 Frame Ground Connected Disconected Overspeed 1 0 2 3 Backup Directory Dial String Signal Ground 1 Test Mode Indication Enable Disable Backup Options Value 3 Auto Bckup Enab Disab 4 Backup Dir Chang 1 10 1 5 Note Values shown in Bold are factory set defaults BckupOnCMI Enab Disab 5 T Not available if a DBM S or DBM D AutoRestor Enab Disab 7 tt Not available if a Primary Core is No NtwkTimOut Chang min and sec 20 sec 8 DBM S or DBM D only RestorTimOut Chan 5 DBM D only imOut Chang 1 9 TriesTimeOut Ch
283. te DSUs equipped with DBM Ss are dedicated to the control DSU MCMP A DSU with TDM is configured as an extended bridge which is used to bridge the aggregate data stream to the Switched 56 DBMs e The control DSU MCMP has its Aggregate Switch configuration option enabled Aggr Sw Enab and the switch s timing set to Aggregate AgSw Timing Ager The aggregate data data framing and diagnostics is routed from the spare Port interface on the control DSU MCMP to the extended bridge e The central site DBM Ss are configured for disruptive diagnostics Diag Type Disr AGGREGATE DATA PATH EXTENDED E BRIDGE e The extended bridge is configured to operate at 56 kbps automatically taking its timing from any port and configured for digital sharing with two ports in the digital sharing group Prt2 being the lowest numbered port It is also configured for Host contention NOTE For this scenario DBM Ss are used however DBM Ds can also be used When a failure occurs the control DSU reports a No Response alarm for the affected tributary DSU The control DSU also reports a Facility Alarm if the control leg of the circuit is affected If all tributaries are affected by the failure and are to be backed up send an sf command to the control DSU with MCMP and enter originate in the Standby Facility State field This causes the DSU to disconnect the downstream DSU and revert to aggregate switch timing which
284. th extensions 4 16 switched 56 kbps D 4 capability optional features 1 2 circuit configuration scenarios D 2 connector non modular TDMjC 2 aggregrate switched backup 4 20 LPDA 2 rhonitoring p sharing extended circuit faceplate 5 3 flex 2 port 1 2 interface cable C 2 teroperability 1 5 mode 4 4 multiplexing 4 56 57 oversampling 4 8 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 Index 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units status indicators 5 5 synchronous channels 2 TDM MCMP adding flex model 3610 mode 3611 B 6 connector EIA 232 V 24 digital test 5 26 modular DSU 3 2 non modular connector non modular DSU ports 2 6 hi gh density connector C 9 terminal power terminology network test bit error rate TDM branch 5 7 5 14 device digital 5 25 end to end 5 27 lamp results bit error rate digital 5 27 end to end transmission multipoint 4 3 point to point transmitter control tributary address 4 41 DDS connection 4 40 DSU 4 54 channel backup DSU considerations 4 46 1 5 1 23 valid addresses verification testing underspeed channel 4 6 V 32 backup DSU with extended circuits high speed DSU 4 17 subrate 4 16 adapter pinouts C 13 connector port 4 53 1 54 2 125 warranty su
285. that are for factory testing only These two straps or switches must not be changed They should remain in the positions shown in Figure 2 2 Most straps for the TDM or MCMP are set as configuration options For additional DSU hardware strap information refer to the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide 2 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3610 Installation LED 1 GREEN EIA 232 LED 2 YELLOW V 35 MUST BE IN THE ON POSITION SWITCH S1 ONLY APPEARS ON 6 PORT TDM FLEX OR MCMP FLEX CARDS 494 1 4496 SWITCH S2 ONLY APPEARS ON MCMP FLEX CIRCUIT CARDS Figure 2 1 Model 3610 TDM Flex or MCMP Flex Switch Locations LED 1 GREEN 232 oO MUST BE IN LED2 gt M ELE YELLOW V 35 POSITION 81 uc L OPTION CARD MUST BE IN THE ON POSITION SWITCH S2 ONLY APPEARS ON MCMP CIRCUIT CARDS 494 13854 03 Figure 2 2 Model 3610 TDM DSD or MCMP DSD Circuit Card Switch Locations 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 2 3 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Changing Hardware Settings If you have a new TDM Flex or MCMP Flex or if you ordered a Flex field installation upgrade for a DSU having firmware version 6 3x or greater you do not change hardware straps you set each port to operate independently of the others via the DCP an async terminal or an NMS If you ordered the 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex field installation upgrade for a DSU having a firmware
286. the DBM and the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit For a DSU equipped with both DBM and TDM or perform a Digital Test on each of the TDM or MCMP ports in Dial Backup mode on the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit 4 Drop the backup 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 3 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units For a DSU equipped with MCMP gt Procedure 1 From the control DSU go to the Control Ctrl branch select LEDs and then select Aggregate Aggr to monitor the aggregate 56 kbps digital signal 2 Goto the Configuration Confg branch and select Poll List PList from the menu 3 Acquire the poll list Acq This command starts the initialization process 4 Verify that each tributary DSU with MCMP has been acquired by displaying Displ the MCMP poll list If the DSU s address does not appear on the list verify that the missing tributary DSU is equipped with the MCMP option and configured for MCMP mode After the poll list has been acquired the LSD and RXD light emitting diodes LEDs should be flashing without a pause at the control DSU s DCP Any pause indicates that a tributary on the poll list is not responding 5 From the tributary DSU if a new drop is being added to an existing MCMP circuit select Add from the Poll List menu This places the tributary DSU on the control DSU s poll list 6 After the tributary DSUs have been added to the control DSU s poll list go back to th
287. the DCP an async terminal or an NMS to verify network operation gt Procedure 1 Request a device Identity D from the Status branch report from each tributary to ensure that the DSU is addressed properly 2 Perform a Digital Test on the DDS circuit to ensure that the network is functioning Refer to the Digital Test section of Chapter 5 For a DSU configured for TDM mode perform a Digital Test on each active port For a DSU configured for MCMP mode perform a Digital Test on each tributary DSU on the aggregate channel For a digital sharing group perform a Digital Test on the lower numbered port in the digital sharing group only NOTE A control DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point or multipoint network A tributary DSU can originate a Digital Test in a point to point network only provided the configuration option Respond to Remote Digital Loopback RespondRDL is enabled in the control For a DSU equipped with a DBM gt Procedure 1 Select the Dial command from Bckup while in Idle Mode to establish a dial call to the tributary to test for dial tone and verify that the DSU can initiate and receive calls 2 Select the Dial command to switch the data to the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit enter Dial Backup mode to ensure that both DSUs been configured correctly 3 Perform a Digital Test on both the DBM and the PSTN or switched 56 kbps circuit For a DSU
288. the DTE to respond to FEP polling The tributary DSU must be added to the poll list A Change Poll List command must be issued from the control DSU s DCP or from NMS to the control DSU to update the poll list The Change Poll List command can also be used to delete a DSU from the poll list When a tributary DSU is deleted from the list associated DTE s no longer respond to FEP polling Switched Carrier Emulation In MCMP transmission switched carrier emulation for each channel is standard in the inbound direction toward the control DSU Transmission of signaling codes is not required the control DSU toggles the Line Signal Detect LSD lead based upon whether or not data is received for that channel MCMP Applications There are five applications using MCMP capability included in this section They include using MCMP capability for multichannel multipoint operation digital sharing extended diagnostics FEP port sharing and backup There is no need to set these configuration options at the tributary DSUs Any values assigned to the configuration options prior to initialization are overwritten during initialization For configuration options see MUX Configuration Options and Port Speed Configuration Options sections of Chapter 5 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 25 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units MCMP The MCMP capability provides multichannel multipoint operation over a 56 kbps DDS multipoint facili
289. tichannel transmission drop 4 3 multispeed operation 1 5 MUX configuration options port configuration options 5 38 setup configuration options list option set NetView initiated dial backup 4 55 network diagnostic connection LADS connections management controlled modification terminology 4 2 NMS control 1 3 1 5 4 52 full backup configuration full backup configuration D 21 software configuration 2 11 4 non modular carrier mounted pin locations C 8 DSU with TDM MCMP 3 2 TDM connector C 2 TDM MCMP connector installation number of tributaries 4 23 operation choosing mode LADS MCMP 25 menus and 5 7 modes 4 4 option 2 1 optional features 1 2 options configuration MUX port port speed 5 39 menu control branch poll list 5 40 MUX setup 5 36 sets port submenu overhead 4 23 oversampling parallel networks partial and full backup 1 5 backup 4 30 4 43 D 6 D 144 D 15 active D 16 D 17 central site bridging dial backup 4 39 password characters 5 42 phone 5 42 pin assignments overview C 1 locations non modular connector circuit card point to point 1 3 circuit digital sharing 4 58 LADS multiplexing 4 5 4 10 single port async sync capability 4 8 1 1 poll list acquiring ad
290. tion Aid This protocol emulates 5822 DSUs that use the LPDA 2 protocol allowing the 3600 Series DSU to be controlled from IBM s NetView network management program With TDM or MCMP this option is only supported on Port 1 For digital sharing all ports are supported NMS control The 3600 Series DSUs operating with the LPDA 2 option can respond to commands from NetView the NMS the DSU s DCP or all three e Full option support With the LPDA 2 option installed all other 3600 Series DSU options are accommodated DBM TDM 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 1 5 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models The 3600 Series DSUs are available in two models Model 3610 is a standalone desktop unit Model 3611 is a circuit card for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier NOTE Except where specifically noted all features and capabilities of the 3600 Series DSUs with the TDM or MCMP option discussed in this applications guide apply equally to both models However the two models are not interchangeable Model 3610 with TDM or MCMP The housing of the Model 3610 DSU with TDM or MCMP has an expanded base which is designed to accommodate both the DSU circuit card and the TDM or MCMP circuit card Figure 1 1 The TDM or MCMP circuit card provides up to five additional 25 pin EIA 232 interface connectors ports on the rear of the housing These ports together with the
291. tions Applications Guide DBM DBM V DBM S DBM D This section discusses the full set of commands available in the Backup branch when a DBM is installed NOTE References to DBM in this guide also apply to a DBM V DBM S or DBM D The Backup branch menu items displayed depend on the DBM s current operating mode Idle mode The DBM has no call in progress but may be either enabled or disabled If the DBM is enabled the DDS circuit is carrying data and diagnostics If the DBM is disabled no calls can be initiated or answered Standby mode The DBM has a dialed or switched 56 kbps connection to another DBM or compatible modem but the DDS circuit is still active and carrying data The dialed or Switched 56 kbps digital circuit carries diagnostic traffic addressed to either the tributary DSU or DBM These diagnostics do not disrupt the DDS circuit e Dial Backup mode A dialed connection is established and is the active link carrying data and diagnostics Table 5 5 lists the current DBM modes the available selections and the mode in which the selection places the DBM 5 12 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 DSU Operations Table 5 5 Backup Branch Menu Selections Idle Bkup Dial out establish and switch to dialed link Dial Backup mode Dial Dial out and establish dialed link Standby mode The data is routed over the DDS circuit Standby Di
292. tive On a flat anti static work surface orient the DSU to its upright position with the faceplate over the edge of the table so the latches hang over and pointing toward you just as it would sit in the carrier Orient the TDM or MCMP circuit card in the same manner to the immediate right of the DSU circuit card Keeping the circuit cards perpendicular to the Work surface move the circuit cards closer to one another ensuring that their bottom edges are flat against the work surface Look between the circuit cards to guide the double ended pin header into its mating connector on the TDM or MCMP circuit card At the same time ensure that the snaplock posts are aligned with their mating holes in the TDM or MCMP circuit card Make sure that the double ended pin headers are properly aligned Then snap the snaplock posts into the TDM or MCMP circuit card Use the remaining three Phillips head screws and flat washers to secure the standoff posts to the TDM or MCMP circuit card At the front of the carrier hold the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP circuit cards unit vertically with the latches on the faceplates in the open position Making sure that both the top and bottom edges of the DSU and TDM or MCMP circuit cards are correctly aligned in the respective circuit card guides slide the DSU TDM or DSU MCMP unit into the slots until the power and network connectors seat firmly into the mating connectors on the backplane 3610 A2 GB41
293. ts RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments RTS CTS Del Chang 0 1040 ms 8 ms increments DTR Alarm Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab DTR Alarm Enab Disab Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 Antistream Chang Disab 1 100 sec async terminal 0 100 DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR FrcOn Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab DSR on Tst Enab Disab Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No Extend Chan Yes No Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 Upstrm Port Prt1 Prt2 Prt4 Prt5 Prt6 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 DTE Port EIA232 V 35 Configuration Worksheet for Mode 2 of 3 Prt6 Options Value PrtSp Options DBM Value PrtSp Options DSU Value Async Sync Enab Disab Prt1 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 0 16 8 14 4 Prt1 64 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19 2 18 8 18 0 16 8 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 0 2 4 2 0 1 2 14 4 12 0 9 6 9 2 8 4 7 2 4 8 4 4 4 0 2 4 R 1800 1200 7 E a 9 0 a sync Rate Sync 1800 1200 600 300 150 Disab 2 0 1 2 Disab AsyncBit Char 6 7 8 9 10 Prt2 56 48 38 4 32 28 8 19
294. twork and the DDS network is again functional Between the time that the bridge is deactivated and the DDS network is reestablished errors occur on those tributaries still in backup Pertinent configuration options for the central site bridge a DBM S and tributary DSU DBMs supporting the nondisruptive diagnostics configuration Please note that all DBM Ss here should be configured the same only the passwords and telephone numbers should differ The same holds true for the tributary DSU DBMs Configuration Options Set the central site bridge configuration options that support the nondisruptive diagnostics configuration as follows Configuration Worksheet for Bridge Mode e Setup MUX Funct CBrdg Bridge Rate ZDSU Brdg Timing Auto Share DevA Enab Lowest DCE Ports in Gp 3 Port Cntrl Host Share DevB Disab e 2 and Prt3 through Prt6 N A RTS Cntrl DTE Elast Stor Enab RTS CTS Del 0 DTR Alarm Disab e DSU Rate Kbps 56 TxClkSource DDS Msg Clamp Enab TxElastStor Disab AggrSwitch Disab Diag DSU Diag Type NonD 2nd Ch bps 400 Disr Type Br56 Diag Gen Position Cntrl LinkConfig M Pt Trib TimOut enter amount of time M Pt SymPrt Disab e Gen DTE Port V 35 Set configuration options for DBM Ss or DBM Ds that support the nondisruptive diagnostics configuration as follows Configuration Worksheet for Basic DBM V DBM S or DBM D Mode
295. ty Figure 4 19 shows an example of channel to port assignments and channel speed selections for MCMP operation the 48 kbps user bandwidth supports four 9600 bps channels and two 4800 bps channels MCMP with Digital Sharing The MCMP capability can be configured for multichannel multipoint and digital sharing at the same CARRIER 4800 BPS A 4800 BPS 9600 BPS NONDISRUPTIVE SECONDARY CHANNEL SC FOR DIAGNOSTIC DATA THAT IS EMBEDDED IN THE 8 KBPS OVERHEAD DDS 56000 BPS time Up to three digital sharing groups can be formed at each tributary site A digital sharing group is formed by assigning the same channel to each port in the group ports the digital sharing group operate at the same speed and all receive the same data The ports do not have to be adjacent to one another which is a restriction when forming a digital sharing group with the TDM capability The host protocol must enforce the order of transmissions to avoid collisions that is the digital sharing group is not configured for contention Refer to the following note if contention is required om c 4800 5 C 9600 BPS F 4800 BPS 4800 BPS E 9600 BPS F 492 12999 01 Figure 4 19 MCMP with Independent Channels 4 26 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation Figure 4 20 shows an MCMP application using three NOTE channels where a digital sharing group
296. uide For DBM and SNA Diagnostic Interface installation information order the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide Hardware Straps HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES This product is designed to protect sensitive components from damage due to electrostatic discharge ESD during normal operation When performing installation procedures however take proper static control precautions to prevent damage to equipment If you are not sure of the proper static control precautions contact your nearest sales or service representative The 6 port Model 3610 TDM Flex or MCMP Flex has two switches with hardware straps refer to Figure 2 1 e Switch SI is for configuring a 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex for 232 or V 35 interface compatibility when the DSU s firmware version is less than 6 3x all ports are configured for either EIA 232 or V 35 operation You can only use 6 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex with a DSU that has a firmware version of less than 6 3x S1 is ignored if the DSU s firmware version is 6 3x or greater the 2 port TDM Flex or MCMP Flex does not have S1 Switch 82 is only located on an MCMP Flex these straps must not be changed For the TDM DSD and MCMP DSD with selectable V 35 or EIA 232 interface compatibility on all ports via an option card there are two hardware straps or switches
297. uide and the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Dial Backup Module and SNA Diagnostic Interface Options Applications Guide for additional pin assignments and V 35 connector pin assignments for Port 1 for all DSU TDMs and DSU MCMPs 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 C 1 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units PLUG TO S 6 FT F HUE 1 FT OCKET 60 POSITION HIGH DENSITY CONNECTOR FIVE 25 PIN EIA 232 CONNECTORS Figure C 1 TDM Interface Cable Feature Number 3600 F2 500 J2 J6 493 12886a 01 Table C 1 1 of 3 Time Division Multiplexer Connector Used with Non Modular TDM 25 Position Socket D Sub P1 Pin Port 1 Pin 01 J3 05 02 J3 17 03 J3 08 04 J3 06 05 J3 12 06 J3 24 07 J3 20 08 J2 07 09 J3 04 10 J4 08 11 J2 08 12 J5 07 13 J3 03 14 J2 02 15 J5 12 1J2 Port 2 J5 Port 5 J3 Port 3 J6 Port 6 J4 Port 4 2 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Pin Assignments Table C 1 2 of 3 Time Division Multiplexer Connector Used with Non Modular TDM 25 Position Socket D Sub P1 Pin Port Pin 16 J2 20 17 J2 24 18 J3 07 19 J2 04 20 J5 02 21 J5 08 22 J2 12 23 J5 04 24 J6 07 25 J6 08 26 J6 06 27 J6 17 28 J6 03 29 J6 12 30 J4 07 31 J4 17 32 J4 02 33 J4 04 34 J4 05 35 J4 03 36 J4 15 37 J4 12 38 J4 24 39 J4 20 40 J3 15 41 J3 02 42 J4 06 43 J5 03 44 J5 15 45 J5 15 1 J2
298. ultipoint Async Compatibility The control DSU with the Single Port Async Sync feature is compatible with earlier DSU releases that use a TDM with the ports configured as a single port sharing group as long as the control DSU s port speed and port sharing group port speeds are the same Earlier DSU releases from 4 xx to 5 xx can be accommodated as long as the control DSU s software version is 6 xx otherwise the units should be returned to the factory to be upgraded Contact your authorized service representative to arrange for your upgrade Figure 4 5 shows a compatible configuration Access the Status Stat branch and select ID Identity to determine the DSU s firmware version DSU SW ver DSU SW ver 6 xx CARRIER Async gt Sync Enab DSU PrtSp Kbps 9 6 1 30 TO OTHER CARRIERS WITH RATE ADAPTION NMS ADDRESS DATA PATH DIAGNOSTIC PATH NOTE For asynchronous ports to operate at 1200 bps individual asynchronous port speeds Async Rate for both the control and tributary DSUs must be set to Sync when the port s Single Port Async Sync capability is enabled AsyncSync Enab DSU SW ver 4 56 KBPS NonD DSU TRIBUTARY 1 30 3 Share DevA Enab DSU Ports 1 3 Async Sync Enab Async Rate Sync PrtSp 9 6 9 6 KBPS DSU SW ver 4
299. uration option should be set to Auto CARRIER DDS 9 6 KBPS TRIBUTARY CONTROLLING DTE DTE AGGREGATE DATA PATH TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE PSTN 9 6 KBPS OR SWITCHED 56 KBPS DIGITAL SERVICE DIGITAL BRIDGE BRIDGE RATE DSU 494 12855 02 Figure 4 35 Central Site Bridging Architecture 9 6 kbps Partial Backup in Effect 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 43 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units When full backup is in effect there is no longer any data communication from the DDS line All tributaries are communicating with the controlling DTE via the digital bridee capability In a central site multipoint dial backup configuration full backup is required if the DBM speed does not equal the DSU speed or if the control DSU reports No Signal or Bipolar Violations Under this condition the bridge is inactive during normal operation To go into full backup the bridge may be activated by an 6800 Series NMS Standby Facility sf command or from the DCP Backup CARRIER CONTROLLING DTE DDS 56 KBPS AGGREGATE DATA PATH Bkup command Figures 4 36 and 4 37 illustrate this The 6700 Series NMS software uses a Device Management window to indicate device status For full backup it is assumed that the control DSU is no longer receiving valid DDS timing In this case the control DSU must be commanded from the DCP or NMS to go into full backup This action
300. utary DSU DBM to switch back to DDS mode both ends then disconnect Alternatively address the control DSU and each of the DBM Vs via the SDCP then issue a DrBU Drop Backup command Automatic restoration is not possible if the DSU rate does not equal the DBM rate and the tributary DSU should not be configured to drop the backup call and switch back to the DDS network upon sensing that the DDS network has been restored because the control DSU will not automatically switch the data path from the bridge to the DSU These procedures also apply when the bridge rate is configured for a value other than DDS 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 4 47 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units LADS Operation The 3600 Series DSUS can be used as a local area data set LADS to provide a point to point link between two The 3600 Series DSUs with TDM or MCMP can be used as a LADS to provide either a multiplexed data devices having like protocols The network facility is a direct 4 wire connection without using a digital service Table 4 1 summarizes the distance limitations governing the use of the 3600 Series DSUs for LADS operation point to point link between two locations or the DSD capability at a remote location The 3600 Series DSUs with the digital bridge capability TDM or MCMP circuit card operating in Bridge mode can be used to support multipoint LADS operation Table 4
301. ve diagnostics are used For MCMP commands issued from NetView only affect Port 1 of the control and tributary DSUs unless Port 1 is in a digital sharing group at the tributary DSU Figure 4 44 shows a TDM circuit with LPDA 2 monitoring The circuit extension to the controller having PU address 1 is the standard application for when an extended circuit is used The cluster controllers connected to the remaining ports are not supported by LPDA 2 monitoring although full support is provided from NMS An example of an MCMP circuit with LPDA 2 monitoring is shown in Figure 4 45 MCMP is essentially the same as TDM for LPDA 2 monitoring DDS 9600 BPS TRIBUTARY DTE 1 FAILURE 1 SITO IT Y 1 L 1 L L 1 1 _ TRIBUTARY PSTN DTE2 9600 BPS PSTN 9600 BPS 492 12848 01 CROSSOVER CABLES ARE USED WITH MODULAR UNITS cose LPDA 2 CONTROL Figure 4 43 Multipoint Dial Backup with LPDA 2 4 56 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Principles of Operation NMS msn Pd LINK 3270 SEGMENT CARRIER LINK SEGMENT E LEVEL 1 3270 NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS LPDA 2 CONTROL 492 12990 01 LINK SEGMENT LEVEL 1 NETVIEW HOST LPDA 2 ADDRESS cem LPDA 2 CONTROL 492 12991 01 Figure 4 45 Multiplexing with LPDA 2 Monitoring 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999
302. when the switch occurs DDS 9600 BPS TRIBUTARY DTE FAILURE TRIBUTARY DTE TRIBUTARY DTE 494 12891 02 Figure D 4 Digital Bridge Configuration Automatic Partial Backup Dial Backup Active 3610 A2 GB41 60 March 1999 D 7 COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Full Backup If the fault is with the central site bridge s local loop a No Signal or a Bipolar Violation alarm is reported for the central site bridge the central site bridge must be placed in Backup mode to eliminate problems with clock slippage Figure D 5 This can be done from the SDCP by selecting Bkup or from the NMS by issuing the Standby Facility sf command and entering originate in the Standby Facility State field When the loop is restored the central site bridge s alarm disappears NOTE To place a call from the DBM V to its tributary at the tributary DSU DBM enable the tributarys DBM configuration option Auto Answer Since both the DBM V and DBM are configured for password security Call Setup PsWrd the DBM V s outgoing password TxPwd must be the same as the tributary DBM s incoming password RxPwd CARRIER 9600 BPS DIGITAL BRIDGE CENTRAL SITE BRIDGE CBrdg The network can be tested by performing a Digital Test DT After the central site bridge is taken out of Dial Backup mode by selecting DrBU using the SDCP or by issuing the sf command and entering release from the NMS
303. work address allows you to change the DBM Backup Diagnostic DSU DBM and General General MUX Setup and Port and Port Speed configuration option sets chafollowed by the DSU s serial number allows you to change the tributary DSU s network address 3 4 March 1999 3610 A2 GB41 60 Model 3611 Installation For the 6700 Series NMS configuration options are menu driven Select Config Network Devices the appropriate submenu selection Tributary 3610 DSUs with TDM or MCMP can be configured from an NMS provided the Position configuration option Diagnostic General is set to Trib from the SDCP and the DSU is connected to a control DSU that is connected to the NMS The COMSPHERE 6700 or 6800 Series NMS which uses the Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp fully supports configuration of the DSUs with TDM and multipoint dial backup or MCMP Configuration of the DSUs from an NMS using either the DPII or DMC protocol is subject to the same limitations identified in the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 User s Guide or the COMSPHERE 3600 Series Data Service Units Models 3610 and 3611 Operator s Guide For more information on the matrix coded format and or the NMS commands refer to your NMS documentation Verification Testing Perform verification testing after any installation After installing and configuring a network including control and tributary DSUs the DDS network and if

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Plustek OpticFilm 7400  Instruction Manual Transmitter M420 pH  IAN 71921 - Lidl Service Website    Samsung HT-TXQ120R Manual de utilizare    Intermec CN70  MkVII CO2 Safety System    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file